JP4777333B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and derives and displays a display result, and is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit. The special game state in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to become the specific display result when the transition condition is satisfied and the normal game state is ended after the specific game state is completed. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a transition condition establishment notification effect capable of notifying that the transition condition is satisfied.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to become advantageous for a player In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, when it is determined to be in a high probability state, it is impossible to specify whether or not to shift to the high probability state when the identification information is variably displayed. There is one that is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying that the state is shifted to the high probability state or that the state is the high probability state after the symbol is derived and displayed.

  For example, Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine that performs a notification effect in accordance with the operating state of the effect switch during a big hit game. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the effect lottery for determining whether to change the effect in the notification effect by one step, perform the probability change confirmation notification, or not change the effect in accordance with the operation of the effect switch. Provide a table. Patent Document 1 describes that as such an effect lottery table, a separate table is provided depending on whether it is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit. Then, every time the effect switch is operated, an effect lottery table for probability variation big hit or non-probability big hit is selected, and the effect in the notification effect is changed by one step, the probability change confirmation notification is performed, or the effect is Decide whether to change. In addition, in Patent Document 1, as a mode of changing the effect during the notification effect, a temporary jackpot stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) that becomes an uncertain variable symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the symbol is re-variable to be finalized. It is described that the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, when the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the final jackpot stop symbol, the probability variation confirmation notification is performed.

JP 2006-271552 A (paragraph 0034-0037, paragraphs 0044-0051, paragraph 0087, FIGS. 5-6, FIG. 7)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the effect in the notification effect is changed based on the operation of the effect switch, the effect of promoting to the probable big hit is performed by the player's operation, and the interest for the game is improved. Can do. However, it is necessary to prepare different production lottery tables for probable big hits and non-probable big jackpots, and to determine the mode of change of production in notification production by separate processing, which is necessary for production lottery tables The storage area is large, and the processing load for determining the change mode of the effect in the notification effect is large. In particular, in the case of performing an effect that repeats temporary stop and re-variation of the symbol in the notification effect, in addition to whether it is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit, different effect lottery tables and different processes for each temporary stop stage Must be executed, and the processing burden in the notification effect increases.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute an effect that is promoted to a probable big hit by a player's operation, and that can minimize an increase in processing load in the notification effect.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that can identify each of them, and variably displaying a display result (for example, the first special symbol). A specific display state (for example, jackpot game) which is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display section. State, and when the transition condition is satisfied (for example, when it is determined that the probability change big hit), the display result of the variable display of the identification information is specified in comparison with the normal state after the specific gaming state is ended. A gaming machine that makes a transition to a special gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) that is likely to be a display result, and executes a transition condition establishment notification effect (for example, a probability variation promotion effect) that can notify that the transition condition has been established. Then, whether or not the display result derived and displayed on the variable display unit is the specific display result and whether or not the transition condition is satisfied when it is determined to be the specific display result are determined before the display result is derived and displayed. Transition conditions are established by performing image display based on the pre-determining means (for example, the part that executes steps S1513 and S1517 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the specific display result determined by the pre-determining means. Notification effect execution means capable of executing the notification effect (for example, a portion of steps S1843, S1844, and S1846-S1869 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the operation button 120). That the transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the transition condition Operation condition determination means (for example, steps S2511 to S2515 in the production control microcomputer 100) that determines an operation condition (for example, the number of notification conditions as a predetermined notification condition) that is a condition related to an operation using the operation means for The notification effect executing means detects an operation by the operation means for each effective period of the operation by the operation means during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect, and displays an image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect. The switching image display control means for changing the image to the switching image and the predetermining means are determined to establish the transition condition, and the operation condition determining means detects the operation by the operating means during the effective period during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect. When the determined operation condition is satisfied , the image displayed in the transition condition satisfaction notification effect When the switching period elapses after the image is changed to the switching image, the image to be displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed from the switching image to a first image (for example, a probability variation pattern) indicating that the transition condition is satisfied. 1-image display control means (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, the portion where the probability variation symbol determined as the temporary stop symbol in step S1856 is temporarily stopped and displayed by executing the process of step S1848) and the first image display control First image selection data (for example, a temporary change symbol determination table (probability change notification table shown in FIGS. 72 and 73) shown in FIGS. 72 and 73) is set to select the first image displayed by the means from a plurality of images. First image selection data setting means for performing (for example, a portion of step S1853 in the production control microcomputer 100) First image selection means for selecting a first image using the first image selection data set by the first image selection data setting means (for example, a part for executing step S1856 in the production control microcomputer 100); When it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied by the predetermining means and an operation by the operating means is detected during the effective period during execution of the transition condition satisfaction notification effect, the image displayed in the transition condition satisfaction notification effect is changed to a switching image. Then, when the switching period has elapsed, the second image display control means (for example, the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed from the switching image to a second image (for example, an uncertain variation pattern) different from the first image). In the production control microcomputer 100, after determining N in step S1850, step S1859 is performed. In order to select the second image displayed by the second image display control means from among a plurality of images, the non-probable variable symbol determined as the temporary stop symbol is displayed in a temporary stop display by executing the process of step S1848. Step 2 in the second image selection data setting means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for setting the two image selection data (for example, the table for determining the temporary stop symbol during the probability change promotion effect shown in FIG. 74 (for non-probability change notification)). After determining “N” in S1850, a portion for executing step S1857) and second image selection means for selecting the second image using the second image selection data set by the second image selection data setting means (for example, In the production control microcomputer 100, after determining “N” in step S1850, step S1859 is executed). Was determined to be satisfied the shift condition by the pre-determination means, when the operating conditions determined by the detected although operating condition determining means operation of the operating means enabled period of the shift condition established notification effect execution is not satisfied After the switching period has elapsed after the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed to the switching image, the image displayed in the transition condition satisfaction notification effect is changed from the switching image to the second image (for example, a non-probable variation pattern) . The image display control means when the operation condition is not satisfied (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, the process of step S1848 is performed on the non-probable variable symbol determined as the temporary stop symbol in step S1859 after determining N in step S1852 And a second image displayed by the image display control means when the operation condition is not satisfied. Selection data common to the second image selection data used by the second image selection means for selecting from a plurality of images (for example, the common probability change promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (non-probability change). Selection data setting means when the operation condition is not established (for example, the part for executing step S1857 after determining N in step S1852 in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) The image selection means when the operation condition is not satisfied, for selecting the second image using the common selection data set by the selection data setting means when the operation condition is not satisfied (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, it is determined as N in step S1852). After that, step S1859 is executed) And butterflies.
The gaming machine determines whether or not to change the variable information display state of the identification information to a predetermined reach state by using the first random number based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the predetermination unit. Reach determining means, and a variation pattern type determining means for determining the variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types using the second random number based on the determination result by the prior determination means and the determination result by the reach determination means And a plurality of variation patterns from the start of variable display of the identification information to the time when the variable display result is derived and displayed are included in one variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination means using the third random number. Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining any one of the types of fluctuation patterns, and the fluctuation pattern type determining means is set to reach by the reach determining means. Corresponding to the determination being made, the second random number is used to determine one of a plurality of types of reach variation pattern types in which the variable information display state of the identification information is set to the reach state, and the reach determination means does not set the reach state. In response to the determination, the second random number is used to determine the variable display state of the identification information as one of a plurality of non-reach variation pattern types that are not in the reach state. Has a reach specific variation pattern type that includes a reach specific variation pattern that executes a specific effect during variable display of the identification information and sets the variable display state of the identification information to a reach state. Non-reach variation pattern types include: Non-reach specific variation pattern types including multiple types of non-reach specific variation patterns that execute specific effects during variable display of identification information, and execute specific effects There is a non-reach normal variation pattern type including a non-reach normal variation pattern, and the variation pattern determination means uses the third random number in response to the determination that the reach state is set by the reach determination means. The change is determined to be one of a plurality of types of reach variation patterns included in one reach variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit, and the reach determination unit determines not to reach the reach state, and the variation In response to being determined as the non-reach specific variation pattern type by the pattern type determining means, the third random number is used to determine one of a plurality of types of non-reach specific variation patterns, and the non-reach specific variation pattern is: Compared to the non-reach normal variation pattern, the variable display result is displayed after the variable information is displayed. The variable display time may be long, and the ratio determined by the variation pattern determination unit may be set to be low.

  The operation condition determination means determines the number of operations of the operation means (for example, the number of notification conditions, specifically, any number of times 1 to 10 shown in FIG. 66) as the operation condition, and performs first image display control. The means is determined to establish the transition condition by the predetermining means, and when the number of times the operation means is operated during the execution of the transition condition satisfaction notifying effect reaches the number of operations determined by the operation condition determining means, the first (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the number of operations is equal to or greater than the number of notification conditions in step S1852, and then performs the process in step S1848 for the probability variation symbol determined as the temporary stop symbol in step S1856. When the operation condition is not satisfied, the image display control means is determined to establish the transition condition by the prior determination means, and the transition condition is displayed. When the number of times the operation means is operated during execution of the condition satisfaction notification effect does not reach the number of operations determined by the operation condition determination means, the second image is displayed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the step Even if it is determined that the number of operations in S1852 is less than the number of notification conditions, the non-probable variable symbol determined as the temporary stop symbol in Step S1859 is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed by executing the processing in Step S1848. Good.

  The notification effect executing means is a display switching effect (for example, an effect during symbol switching. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 90B, 90D, and 90F), the display content is switched based on the operation by the operating means. Switching effect execution means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) that moves the movable member 90 imitating the shape of a branch and executes an effect of displaying the cherry blossom petals on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The first image display control means displays the first image after executing the display switching effect by the switching effect executing means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured to execute steps S1860 to S1867 in FIG. Then, after the effect measurement timer during symbol switching times out in step S1865, the process of step S1848 is executed. The second image display control means displays the second image after executing the display switching effect by the switching effect executing means (for example, the effect). The control microcomputer 100 executes the process in step S1848 after the symbol switching effect measurement timer has timed out in step S1865, and determines the temporary stop symbol determined in step S1859 after determining N in step S1850. When the operation condition is not established, the image display control means displays the second image after executing the display switching effect by the switching effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is After the symbol switching effect measurement timer times out in step S1865, step S18 8 is executed to switch to the non-probable variable symbol as the temporary stop symbol determined in step S1859 after determining N in step S1852), and the display switching effect is being executed by the switching effect execution means. In some cases, an operation invalidation means for invalidating the operation by the operation means (for example, when the operation invalidation flag is set in step S1861 and the operation invalidation flag is set in step S1846 in the production control microcomputer 100). It may be configured to further include a part for controlling not to shift to the processing after step S1847.

  The gaming machine uses difficulty level changing means (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, the previous operation failure flag is set in step S2511) to change the operation condition to a condition having a different difficulty level for the operation based on the operation status of the operation means. If not set, the probability variation promotion operation count determination table (normal time) is selected in step S2512. If the previous operation failure flag is set in step S2511, the probability change promotion operation count determination table (previous operation failure) is determined in step S2513. And a portion for determining the number of notification conditions in step S2515 using the selected probability variation promotion operation number determination table.

  The gaming machine includes effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S1625 to S1629 shown in FIG. 92 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that executes a game effect according to the game state, and the effect execution means is a specific game. As an effect to be executed in a game state other than the state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state, or a short time state), at least a special effect that can specify that the game state is a special game state (for example, a probability change state) can be executed. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S1627 shown in FIG. 92 and displays a red background as the background color on the production display device 9), when it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied. In the notification effect establishment notification effect by the notification effect execution means, based on the fact that the operation condition is not satisfied When the image is not displayed, an effect other than the special effect is executed after the specific gaming state is ended (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S1629 shown in FIG. 92 to display the effect display device 9). (A green background is displayed as the background color).

  The variable display unit includes a first variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that variably displays a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) each of which can be identified. It consists of a second variable display section (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that variably displays a plurality of types of second identification information that can be identified (for example, a second special symbol), and controls the progress of the game, Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling variable display of the first variable display section and the second variable display section is provided, and the game control means is configured to execute a variable display execution condition in the first variable display section. First counting means (for example, a part for executing steps S213 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) for counting the number of established (for example, the first reserved storage number), and a variable table in the second variable display unit A second counting means (for example, a part for executing steps S223 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) that counts the number of established execution conditions (for example, the second reserved memory number), and at least the second variable display unit On the condition that the variable display of the identification information is not executed, the variable display of the identification information is executed on the first variable display unit, and on the condition that the variable display of the identification information is not executed on at least the first variable display device. Variable display executing means for executing variable display of the identification information on the second variable display device (for example, a part for executing steps S334 to S337, S351 to S353, S1301, and S35 in the game control microcomputer 560), and variable The display executing means is counted by the first counting means when the display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display section. When the number of establishments is 1 or more and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means is 1 or more, the number of establishments counted by the first counting means is larger than the number of establishments counted by the second counting means Sometimes, the variable display of the identification information on the first variable display unit is executed in preference to the variable display of the identification information on the second variable display unit (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S1504). In step S1506, data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  The variable display unit includes a first variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that variably displays a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) each of which can be identified. It consists of a second variable display section (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that variably displays a plurality of types of second identification information that can be identified (for example, a second special symbol), and controls the progress of the game, Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling variable display of the first variable display section and the second variable display section is provided, and the game control means is configured to execute a variable display execution condition in the first variable display section. First counting means (for example, a part for executing steps S213 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) for counting the number of established (for example, the first reserved storage number), and a variable table in the second variable display unit Second counting means (for example, a part for executing steps S223 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560), a first variable display unit, and a second variable 2 variable display time determining means for determining the variable display time of the identification information in the variable display section (for example, a part for executing steps S331 to S333 in the game control microcomputer 560), the variable display time determining means, The total number corresponding to the sum of the number of establishments counted by the first counting means and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means (for example, the total number of reserved storage) is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more or 3 or more) In this case, the variable display time is shortened compared with the case where the total number is less than the predetermined number (for example, a game control microcomputer). 560 is a process of steps S331 to S333. When the gaming state is the normal state, if the total number of reserved memories is 3 or 4, the shortened variation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved memories is If the game state is the probabilistic state, the shortened variation pattern of the non-reach PB1-2 is determined if the total reserved memory number is 2-8. When the gaming state is the short-time state, the shortened variation pattern of the non-reach PC 1-2 may be determined if the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8.

  The variable display unit includes a first variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that variably displays a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) each of which can be identified. It comprises a second variable display section (for example, second special symbol display 8b) that variably displays a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, second special symbol) that can be identified. Corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information in the variable display section and the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display section, variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, effect symbols) is executed. An image display device (for example, an effect display device 9), and game control means for controlling the variable display of the first variable display section and the second variable display section (for example, a game control microcomputer 560). ) With game control The stage executes first counting means (for example, steps S213 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560) that counts the number of fulfilled execution conditions (for example, the first reserved memory number) of the variable display in the first variable display unit. Part) and the second counting means (for example, steps S223 and S1509 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed) for counting the number of established execution conditions (for example, the second reserved memory number) in the second variable display unit. And a reach effect determining means (for example, determining whether or not to execute the reach effect in the variable display of the effect identification information in the image display device when it is determined not to be the specific display result by the pre-deciding means) , A portion for executing steps S327 and S328 in the game control microcomputer 560) The reach effect determining means includes the first counting means when the total number (for example, the total number of reserved storages) of the number of establishments counted by the first counting means and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means is large. It is determined that the reach effect is executed at a small rate compared to the case where the total number of the establishment number counted by the second counting means and the establishment number counted by the second counting means is small (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 When the gaming state is the normal state in steps S327 and S328, when the total number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in FIG. 15, according to the reach determination value included in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. It is determined that the reach effect will be executed with a probability of 14.6%, and the reach effect will be executed with a smaller probability of 9.2% when the total number of reserved memories is one. If the total number of reserved memories is two, it is determined that the reach effect will be executed with an even smaller probability of 7.9%, and if the total number of reserved memories is three or more, the probability is further reduced to 3.8%. It may be configured to determine that the reach effect is executed.

  The gaming machine uses the reach determination random number (for example, the reach determination random number value MR2-2) based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the predetermining unit, and the variable display state of the identification information Reach determining means for determining whether or not to reach a reach state (for example, a part for executing steps S327 and S328 in the game control microcomputer 560) and for determining the variation pattern type based on the determination result by the reach determining means Fluctuation pattern type determination means (for example, step S331 in the game control microcomputer 560) that determines a variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types using a random number (for example, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type). Portion to be executed) and the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern type determination means Fluctuation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern of identification information using a variation pattern determination random number (for example, variation pattern determination random number MR4) from among variation patterns included in the type, for example, a game control microcomputer 560 And a control unit (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) for executing an effect display corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determining means during the variable display of the identification information. It may be configured.

  The variation pattern type determination unit uses the variation pattern type determination random number (for example, the random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination) in response to the determination that the reach state is set by the reach determination unit. One of a plurality of variation pattern types according to the reach state is determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 uses normal CA2-1 to CA2-3 shown in FIG. 16 as variation pattern types in step S331, A random number for determining a variation pattern type (for example, for determining a variation pattern type) in response to the determination that the reach determination unit does not enter the reach state. Specific presentation (for example, “slip”) in the variable display device during the variable display of the identification information using the random number MR3) It is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type for executing “pseudo train”, “intro”, “end of development chance end”, etc. (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 In step S331, either the non-reach CA1-4 or the non-reach CC1-2 shown in FIG. 17 is determined as the variation pattern type), and the variation pattern determination unit determines that the reach state is set by the reach determination unit. Correspondingly, a variation pattern determination random number (for example, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) is selected from a plurality of types of reach variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination means. To determine any variation pattern of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 In step S333, normal PA2-1 to PA2-4, super PA3-1 to PA3-8, super PB3-1 to PB3-5, super PC3-1 to PC3-4 shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. In accordance with the determination that the reach state is not set to the reach state by the reach determination means, and the change pattern type determination means determines the change pattern type to execute a specific effect. The variation pattern of the information is determined as one of a plurality of types of non-reach variation patterns that execute a specific effect using a variation pattern determination random number (for example, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination) (for example, game control) The microcomputer 560 uses the non-reach shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 20 as a variation pattern in step S333. (Any one of PA1-4 to PA1-7 is determined).

In the first aspect of the invention, the notification effect execution means is determined to establish the transition condition by the prior determination means, and the operation condition determination means detects an operation by the operation means during the effective period during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect. When the operation condition determined by is satisfied , the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed to the switching image, and after the switching period has elapsed, the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is transferred from the switching image to the transition condition. Since the first image display control means for changing to the first image indicating that is established is included, it is possible to execute an effect that promotes to a state in which the transition condition is established by the player's operation. it can. Further, the notification effect executing means is determined to establish the transition condition by the predetermining means , and the operation determined by the operation condition determining means is detected when the operation of the operation means is detected during the effective period during execution of the transition condition satisfaction notification effect. When the condition is not satisfied, the image displayed in the transition condition satisfaction notification effect is changed from the switching image to the second image after the switching period has elapsed after the image displayed in the transition condition satisfaction notification effect is changed to the switching image . and causing the operation condition is not satisfied when the image display control means, in order to select the second image to be displayed operating condition is not satisfied when the image display control means from among a plurality of images, a second image selection data used by the second image selecting means The selection data setting means when the operation condition is not established and the selection data setting means when the operation condition is not established and the common selection data are set. And an image selection means for selecting the second image using the selection data when the operation condition is not satisfied. Therefore, a necessary storage area for storing the selection data for selecting the second image data is provided. This can be reduced, and an increase in processing load in the transition condition establishment notification effect can be minimized.

Is operation condition determining means determines the number of operations of the operation means as an operation condition, the first image display control means is determined to establish the shift condition by the pre-determination means, the operation during the shift condition established notification effect execution when the unit is the number of times that has been operated has reached the number of operations that are determined by the operating condition determining means, by being configured to display the first image, the state shift condition is satisfied by an operation number of the player An effect such as promotion can be executed.

If it is running display switching effect by SWITCHING demonstration execution unit, by being configured to further includes an operation disabling means for disabling the operation by the operation means, during display switching effect operation by the operation means Is not accepted, and the display switching effect can be started at the timing when the operation by the operating means is performed during a period other than during the execution of the display switching effect. Therefore, the player can feel that the display switching effect has been started by the operation of the operation means.

Based on the operation status of the operation means, a notification condition, by the difficulty related to the operation is configured with a difficulty level changing means for changing the different conditions, shift condition established notification in accordance with the characteristics of the player An effect can be executed and a player's interest in the occurrence of a special gaming state can be improved.

When it is determined that to establish a transition condition, the shift condition established notification effect by notification effect executing means, when the first image based on the notification condition is not satisfied is not displayed, a specific game state It is determined that the transition condition is internally established after the specific game state is ended regardless of the operation using the operation means by the player by performing the effect other than the special effect after the end. It is possible to prevent a situation where it is grasped that the game is being performed, and to prevent the player's willingness to use the operation means and the interest in the game from being reduced.

Variable display execution means, when derived displayed the display result to the first variable display unit, the number of established number of satisfied counted by the first counting means has counted by the second counting means with at least one In the above case, when the number of establishments counted by the first counting unit is larger than the number of establishments counted by the second counting unit, variable display of the identification information on the first variable display unit is performed on the second variable display unit. by being configured to run in preference to the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to reduce the number of establishment of the execution conditions of invalid variable display.

Variable display time determining means, when the total number corresponding to the sum of the number satisfied counted by the number satisfied counted by the first counting means and the second counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the total number is less than a predetermined number By shortening the variable display time as compared with the case where the total number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is shortened by one of the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the variation is performed and the shortened variation is not performed in the other variable display unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to reduce the situation where the execution of the variable display execution condition becomes invalid. Therefore, the operating rate of variable display can be improved.

Yu skill control means when it is determined not to identify the display result by predetermination means, the reach demonstration determination means for determining whether to execute the reach effect on the variable display of the effect identification information in an image display device The reach production determining means includes the number of establishments counted by the first counting means and the second number when the total number of establishments counted by the first counting means and the number of establishments counted by the second counting means are large. compared to when a small total number of the number of satisfied counted by the counting means, by determining to perform the reach demonstration in a small proportion, counted by the number of satisfied counted by the first counting means and a second counting means When the total number with the established number is large, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the reach effect during the variation display of the identification information. Therefore, in a gaming machine including the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit, the operation rate of variable display can be improved. Further, by improving the operating rate of variable display, it is possible to reduce the situation where the establishment of the variable display execution condition becomes invalid.

Based on the determination result by rie Ji determining means, a variation pattern type determining means for determining the one of a plurality of kinds of variation pattern type identification information using the variation pattern type determination random number, determined by the variation pattern type determination means A reach state is achieved by comprising a variation pattern determining means that determines a variation pattern of identification information using a variation pattern determination random number from among variation patterns included in the variation pattern type. Regardless of whether the determination is made or not, the variation pattern type can be determined using a common variation pattern type determination random number, and the data capacity for determining the variation pattern (to determine the variation pattern) The data capacity of the work area can be reduced.

Is fluctuation pattern type determination means, in response to the decision to a reach state by Reach determination means is made, any of a plurality of types corresponding to the reach state using the variation pattern type determination random number variation pattern type In response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the reach determination means, a specific effect is executed on the variable display device during the variable display of the identification information using the random number for determining the variation pattern type. As a result, it is determined that a specific display result is not used, and a decision is made not to reach a reach state. Even at times, a specific effect can be executed during the variable display. Therefore, even when the specific display result is not obtained and the reach mode is not achieved, various effects can be executed during the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, regardless of whether or not the reach state is determined, the variation pattern type is determined using the common random number for determining the variation pattern type, so that the data capacity for determining the variation pattern can be reduced. it can.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The effect display device 9 performs variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols as identification information. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  In addition to the effect display device 9, the first decorative symbol display that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. And a second decorative symbol display 9b for performing variable display of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. It may be. In this case, the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b are controlled by the production control microcomputer 100, and are constituted by, for example, two LEDs or seven-segment LEDs.

  In addition, a movable movable member 90 for decoration is disposed on the right side portion of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a movable member 90 simulating the shape of a branch of cherry blossoms is arranged. The device 9 is movable so as to overlap the front side of the display screen.

  A first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the top of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, and is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. ing. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6. The second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, and is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The special symbol display unit is configured as one display unit, and a part of the display area forms a first variable display unit for variably displaying the first special symbol, and the other part of the display area is the first display unit. You may form the 2nd variable display part which performs the variable display of 2 special symbols. In this case, for example, the special symbol display is configured as one display including four 7-segment LEDs, of which two 7-segment LEDs form the first variable display, and the other two 7-segment LEDs are A second variable display portion may be formed.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established by prioritizing the winning to the second starting winning port 14 out of the winning to the first starting winning port 13 and the winning to the second starting winning port 14. . That is, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and if the big hit game is not executed, even if the first reserved memory number is not 0, the second The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the number of reserved memories becomes zero. It should be noted that the variable display start condition may be established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The display of the effect symbol as a symbol for “for” is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement in the vicinity of the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  On the left side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a including four indicators (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  To the right of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A hold storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a total reserved storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total reserved storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition. Since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided below the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 The opening time becomes longer and the number of opening times is increased. Further, in this embodiment, even in the short time state (the gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time is shortened), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In this embodiment, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. This operation button 120 is operated by the player during execution of the probability variation promotion effect described later. When the operation button 120 is pressed by the player, it is turned on when the electrode comes into contact with it, and an on signal (detection signal) is mounted on the board (in this embodiment, on the effect control board 80). It is output to the mounted effect control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 3). In the example shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 120 is provided on the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, but may be provided at another location (for example, directly above the hitting ball operation handle 5).

  In this embodiment, when a jackpot is determined, a probability change promotion effect that notifies whether or not to be promoted to a probability change is executed, a predetermined notification condition is established, and a probability change jackpot is internally determined As a condition, it is informed that it will be promoted to probability change. In this embodiment, on the condition that a predetermined notification condition is established based on the operation performed by the operation button 120 during execution of the probability variation promotion effect, and further, it is determined that the probability variation big hit internally. You will be notified that you will be promoted to a certain change. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the probability change promotion effect is executed at the end of the change based on the variable display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being a big hit, An effect of notifying that the operation button 120 is promoted to a certain probability when the operation button 120 is pressed more than a predetermined condition is executed. In this case, when the player presses the operation button 120 more than the predetermined number of times that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, and it is notified that the player is promoted to the probability change on condition that the probability change big hit is internally determined. Is done.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and performs a specific display based on the random R. It is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a result, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot. When it is determined that the game is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the total reserved memory number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control with the effect display device 9 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103a. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a detection signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 103b. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives, via the input port 103b, a movable position sensor 90B that detects that the movable member 90 has reached the maximum movable position, and an initial position that detects that the movable member 90 has reached the initial position. A detection signal from the sensor 90C is input. In addition, the production control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the movable portion drive motor 90 </ b> A via the output port 106 in order to move the movable member 90. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The VDP 109 reads out necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command in accordance with the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data read from the character ROM in accordance with the instruction from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 8a is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port 13 is detected by the first starting port switch 13a. After the start condition is satisfied, the process is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. The variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed after the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 14 is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. For example, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state being ended.

  In the special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, a fixed special that results in a variable symbol variable display result is obtained. The symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the variable display of the special symbol becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1” and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “5” are small hit symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. It is said. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special symbols.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1” and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is the 15-round jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “1” is displayed. The symbol is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened by opening the big winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is executed to change to the first state advantageous to the player. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the special prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 20 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the jackpot gaming state (two round jackpot state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round Is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) that is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) during which the game is changed to the first state advantageous to the player It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” which is the 15-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, either the normal big hit or the probable variable big hit is displayed. It will be a big hit. The special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is a regular jackpot based on the fact that the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable symbol display. After the 15-round jackpot state ends, the normal state Compared to, the special symbol variable time in the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) is controlled to a short time state. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a short-time state, a probability variation state described later, and a small hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system) As in the case of resetting, the same control as in the case where the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. In this embodiment, after the big hit game with the normal big hit, the short time state is that the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit”. The process ends when any of the conditions is satisfied first.

  A special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol. After the two round jackpot state is over based on the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is the jackpot symbol, being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the variable symbol display, the special symbol changes compared to the normal state, for example. As time is shortened, control is performed to a probability change state (high probability gaming state) in which probability variation control (probability change control) is continuously performed. In this probability change state, in the variable display of each special symbol and the variable display of the production symbol, the variable display result becomes “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved to be higher than the normal state. . In this embodiment, the probability variation state is a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the probability variation state, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The process ends when either condition is satisfied first. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of variable symbol special display. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is a “big hit”, the variable state of the special symbol is started at the predetermined rate when the variable symbol display starts. May be terminated.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening for the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 20 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display unit 10 can be controlled so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, or the normal symbol can be variably displayed each time. Control for improving the probability that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal symbol” than in the normal state, and the movable blade piece in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal symbol”. The second start condition is increased by increasing the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 such as control for making the tilt time of the game longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared with that in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is facilitated by the fact that the above is easily established. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the normal state other than the probability variation state and the short time state, the first start winning port 13 is easier to start than the second start winning port 14, but the probability variation state or In the short-time state, the second start winning opening 14 is easier to start than the first starting winning opening 13. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the period from the start of variable display of the production symbol to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the finalized design symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production symbol display areas, the variable display of the production symbol The state may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is an effect design ("reach fluctuation design") that is not yet stopped when the effect design that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas (eg, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas) constitutes a predetermined jackpot combination. In the remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect symbol display area, etc.) that has not yet been stopped when the effect symbol (for example, an effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) is stopped, In the display state where is changing, or in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, all or part of the effect symbols change in synchrony while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination Is in the display state. In response to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or changing the variation pattern of the effect design. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”. In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player is made depending on a variable display mode of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, “development opportunity”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “slip”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “left”) are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of effect symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display of the effect symbol display areas (For example, one or both of the “left” effect symbol display area and the “right” effect symbol display area, or both) An effect display is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display or changing the effect symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the produced design symbol is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the effect symbol may be re-fluctuated after the effect symbol is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effects are produced based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the variable symbol variable display is satisfied once. After changing the production symbol in all of the symbol display area, after temporarily stopping the production symbol in all the production symbol display areas, change the production symbol in all the production symbol display areas again (pseudo continuous variation) ) Can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 4A is configured in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. The effect design to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Here, “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” effect symbol display area, and “middle symbol” is displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific production of “Intro”, after changing the production symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production symbol display areas, the finalized production symbols are stopped in all the production symbol display areas. Before the display (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  For the specific effects of “Development Opportunities”, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” and then predetermined in all effect symbol display areas. After the effect symbols constituting the development chance included in the special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the effect symbols as the reach state. As an example, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The effect design to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “End of Development Opportunity”, the production symbols are changed in all of the production symbol display areas of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”, and then developed in all the production symbol display areas. An effect display is performed in which an effect symbol of a predetermined combination as a chance is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “development opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol.

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production and the specific production, for example, by displaying other than the variable display mode of the production symbol, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable.

  In the notice display effect of “character display”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” Effect display that displays a character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9 is performed before the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area and the like.

  In the “step-up image” notice effect, the effect symbol is changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the effect is displayed in two or more effect symbol display areas. Before the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the effect display device 9 may be performed. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the “email display” notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the effect symbols are displayed in two or more effect symbol display areas. Before the temporary stop display, an effect display that changes the effect operation is performed, for example, the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player. Is called.

  When the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol variable display, the variable symbol display state does not become the reach state after the variable symbol display is started. In some cases, the finalized design that becomes a predetermined non-reach combination or the finalized design that becomes one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol, the variable symbol display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state after the production symbol variable display has started. Corresponding to the above, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  If the special symbol showing the number “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a normal jackpot as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. Correspondingly, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the definite effect symbol that is a combination reminiscent of a predetermined normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is a combination that normally recalls a big hit is, for example, a symbol number that is variably displayed in each effect symbol display area of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the symbols with the even numbers“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” As long as it is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each effect symbol display area. In this way, the effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  In this embodiment, when the effect symbol is displayed on one line in each effect symbol display area of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9 as the predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where one effective line is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a plurality of effective lines (for example, five lines) may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, there are three probability variation big hits, the first probability variation big hit and the second probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is a 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the first probability change and the second In any one of the two display modes of probability change, the effect display device 9 performs variable display of the effect symbols. In addition, the display mode of the first probability variation is to execute the reach effect (for example, normal reach) similar to the case of “normal” during the variable display of the effect symbol, or without performing the reach effect. This is a display mode in which a definite effect symbol that is a combination reminiscent of a probabilistic big hit is stopped and displayed with a high probability as a stop symbol. In addition, the display mode of the second probability change is to execute a reach effect (for example, super reach) different from the case of “normal” during variable display of the effect symbol, and to recall the probability variable big hit as a stop symbol of the effect symbol. This is a display mode in which the definite effect symbols to be combined are stopped and displayed with high probability.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is a 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the first special variable big hit as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variable symbol display state of the production symbol is the reach state. Corresponding to this, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a combination that recalls a predetermined probability change big hit The finalized design symbol that becomes is sometimes displayed with a high probability. Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is a jackpot combination reminiscent of a probable big hit is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. Among the effect symbols of “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each effect symbol display area of “right”. The effect symbols whose odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation symbols.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is a 15-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the second special variable big hit as the confirmed special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol is the reach state. Correspondingly, after a reach effect that is different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, there is a high probability of a definite effect symbol (probability variation symbol) that becomes a jackpot combination reminiscent of a predetermined probability variation jackpot Is stopped and displayed.

  When the special symbol indicating the number of “1” that is the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state, and is predetermined. The non-reach combination finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed, or the finalized design symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 4B is stopped or displayed. In some cases, a confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in C) is stopped and displayed. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is the two-round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. Corresponding to the above, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is the two-round jackpot symbol, the variable of the rendered symbol in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed. The display mode is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the same as when the effect symbol variable display mode is “surprise”. After the effect symbols are variably displayed, the confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the confirmed effect that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. A symbol may be displayed in a stopped state, or a finalized design that may be a predetermined reach combination may be displayed in a stopped state. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” which is the small hit symbol, the variable display of the effect symbols in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed. The mode is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 4C is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise”, and the variable display mode is “small”. In the case of “winning” or the like, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol. In other words, when a confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “accuracy”. Determine. In addition, you may make it use in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, and the case of small hit in common the sudden chance eyes TC1-TC4 shown in FIG.4 (C). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult to know whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit (that is, whether or not the game state is shifted to the probability change state).

  In addition, after the variable display result becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” continues. If it is determined that the probability change state or the short-time state is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state. You may make it carry out, and you may make it control to a normal state at the time of completion | finish of the fluctuation display used as a small hit.

  Next, control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 9, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 27L and 27R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001 (H) is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Command 8002 (H) is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Command 81XX (H) corresponds to a variable display of special symbols, and a variation pattern such as an effect symbol that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” in effect display device 9. This is a change pattern specification command to be specified. Here, XX (H) indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXX (H) is a display result command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the display result command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), a prior determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. In response to the jackpot type determination result of whether the display pattern variable display mode is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, different EXT data Is set.

  Specifically, the command 8C00 (H) is a first display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01 (H) is a second display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “ordinary big hit”. The command 8C02 (H) is a third display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “first probability variation big hit”. The command 8C03 (H) is a fourth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “second probability variation big hit”. The command 8C04 (H) shows a determination result that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”, that is, the fifth display that designates suddenly sudden change big hit. Result command. Command 8C05 (H) is a sixth display result command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect symbol stop designation command for designating stop of variable display of effect symbols in each of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. The common design symbol stop designation command is used.

  Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is the normal state, and command 9501 (H) is transmitted when the gaming state is the high probability state. Effect control command (high probability state background designation command). Hereinafter, the effect control commands of commands 9500 (H) and 9501 (H) are referred to as background designation commands. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the type (for example, color) of the background to be displayed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the received background designation command. In this embodiment, the normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H)) is transmitted even when the gaming state is controlled to the short time state without the high probability state.

  A0XX (H) is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the display result command, “01” to “03” are used as the EXT data according to whether the type of big hit is a normal big hit, the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit. However, regardless of the type of jackpot, the same data (for example, “01”) may be set as the EXT data in the hit start designation command.

  The command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the 15th round big hit that designates the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the 15th round big hit state. It is. Command A2XX (H) displays an effect image (for example, an effect image in the interval between rounds) during the period when the big prize opening changes from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the 15 round big hit that is designated after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  Command A3XX (H) is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result command or the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result command or the hit start designation command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the display result command, “01” to “03” are used as the EXT data according to whether the type of big hit is a normal big hit, the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit. However, regardless of the type of jackpot, the same data (for example, “01”) may be set as the EXT data in the hit end designation command.

  Command A4XX (H) is a two-round big hit state based on the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”, or a small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit” In response to the above, a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit is designated for designating the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XX (H) specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state This is a command to specify after opening the big prize opening for accuracy and small hits. For example, in the command for opening the big winning opening for the accuracy / small hit and the command specifying after opening the big winning opening, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big hit state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  In this embodiment, even when the variable display result is “small hit”, a case where a special winning opening opening designation command, a special winning opening open designation command, and a winning end designation command are transmitted is shown. When the variable display result is “small winning”, the special winning opening open designation command, the special winning opening open designation command, and the winning end designation command may not be transmitted.

  Command B001 (H) is based on the fact that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, and the first start condition for executing variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is established. This is the first start opening prize designation command for notifying that. Command B002 (H) is based on the fact that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14, and the second start condition for executing variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is established. This is the second start opening prize designation command for notifying that.

  The command C0XX (H) is used to display the total reserved memory number and the second reserved memory so that the total reserved memory number can be specified on the total reserved memory display unit 18c provided in the display area of the effect display device 9. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value with the number. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the pending storage count notification command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the value (for example, “1” to “8”) of a total pending storage count counter described later. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the total reserved memory number Can be specified.

  Next, each random number used in the game control process in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. On the main board 31, for example, a random number circuit 503 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR2 for determining a reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4.

  Note that the CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 to update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical values indicating a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. Data may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently from the CPU 56 by the random number circuit 503, and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software by the CPU 56 using a random counter. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the variable symbol special display is controlled as a big hit game state, and the variable display result is set as the “small hit”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “65535”.

  The random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “normal”, “first positive change”, “second positive change”, “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Is a random number value used to determine one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used for determining the variation pattern type of the effect symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR3 is in a range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the effect design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “251” is used. Take.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is classified into the reach variation pattern type (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in the reach state, or reach. This is a random value for categorizing whether or not the variation pattern type has a specific effect (for example, “slip” effect) when not in the state. Then, after classification, which random pattern MR4 is used to determine which variation pattern among the classified variation pattern types (for example, variation pattern including which super reach A of the classified variation patterns of super reach A is included) Is determined).

  FIG. 7 shows the variation of the effect symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. Further, as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the display pattern variable display mode is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 5. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PA5-1 to super PA5-4, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1 -1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3 Variation patterns of -1 to special PG3-3 are prepared.

  The ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of effect symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 9B. ing. The first special symbol display result determination table 130A displays the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as "", and whether to control to the small hit gaming state as the "small hit" as the variable display result based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referred to. The first special figure display result determination table 130 is a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether a probability change flag, which will be described later, is OFF or ON (whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state). Are set data (determination data), etc., associated with (assigned to) big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, and loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B displays the variable display result as “big hit” before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. ”Is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B decides to assign the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9, the second special figure display result determination table 130B includes only the big hit determination value data and the loss determination value data. Judgment value data may be included. Then, using the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable special display result of the second special symbol as “big hit”, and variable display of the second special symbol It may be determined whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with the result as “small hit”.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the variable symbol display mode of the effect symbols as “normal”, “based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, and “surprising probability”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the value of a special symbol pointer (special symbol pointer value) to be described later is 1 or 2 (whether it is a jackpot corresponding to variable display of the first special symbol, Depending on whether it is a big hit corresponding to variable display), the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is “normal” or “first certain variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to the big hit types of “second probability variation” and “surprise probability”. Further, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets a value of a jackpot type buffer (a jackpot type buffer value), which will be described later, corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the random number MR2-1 for the jackpot type determination. Table data (setting data) for setting to any of “03” may be included.

  In this embodiment, in the setting of the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, depending on whether the special symbol pointer value is 1 or 2, the random value for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type of “surprise” The assignment of MR2-1 is different. That is, when the special symbol pointer value is 1, a value in the range of “83” to “100” of the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise” When the special symbol pointer value is 2, the random hit value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “Success”. With such a setting, when the first start condition for starting variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is satisfied, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is established, and the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The ratio determined to be “accurate” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 11 (A) to 11 (F) and FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. The selection table is selected according to the determination result of the jackpot type. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “surprising probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4. -2, special CC 4-1, and special CC 4-2.

  As an example, focusing on the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A used when the big hit type is “normal”; With the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation”, the variation pattern type determination for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is performed. The assignment of the random number MR3 for use is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, whereas in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. Thus, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected in accordance with the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H, and 132I used when the big hit type is “probability”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise” such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 11 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132E for jackpot shown in FIG. 11 (E) used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the variation patterns of the normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. In this way, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132E (selected when “normal”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B, 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination When the tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H and 132I (selected when “crash probability”) are compared with each other, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type depending on whether it is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state. Against is different, and there may be assigned a variation pattern type determination random number value for MR3 for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 13D, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is used for determining that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 assigned the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 13B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 13C, the big hit shown in FIG. Also in the fluctuation pattern type determination table 132I for use, a random value MR3 for determination of the fluctuation pattern type is assigned. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 11D, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C are used to determine the reach determination random number MR2-2 as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Furthermore, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random values assigned to non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to each of the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With this setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing reach occurrence probabilities when it is decided not to make a big hit or a small hit. In this embodiment, using the reach determination tables 134A, 134B, and 134C shown in FIG. 14, it is determined whether to execute the reach effect with the probability shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 3.8% if the total number of reserved memories is three or more, If the total number of reserved memories is 2, it is determined to execute the reach effect with a probability of 7.9%, and if the total number of reserved memories is 1, it is determined to execute the reach effect with a probability of 9.2%, If the total number of reserved memories is 0, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 14.6%. Regardless of the total number of reserved memories, if the gaming state is a probabilistic state, it is determined that the reach effect is executed with a probability of 1.7%. It is decided to execute the reach production.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memories (that is, the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is large, The frequency of performing the reach effect during the variable display is reduced. For this reason, the operating rate of the variable display can be improved, and the processing load on the game control means (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560) is reduced. Even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, the frequency of executing the reach effect may be reduced when the total number of reserved memories is large. Further, according to the gaming state, when the total number of reserved memories is large, the frequency of executing the reach effect may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to prolong the effect by the variable display and to improve the interest in the game.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type determination table for reach 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach is a reach HA2-1 to a reach HA2-3, a reach HB2-1, or a reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, “1” to “1” among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, according to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 indicates that the reach determination random number MR 2-2 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA 2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2”. The determination result of reach HA2-3 indicates that the total pending storage number is either “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 18, 19A and 19B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes the loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the change pattern according to whether or not the reach state is reached, the determination result of the change pattern type, and the like when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” according to the variation pattern type. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern corresponds to the variation pattern type when the variable display result of the effect symbol is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, in response to the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-3, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development opportunity eye” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and perform an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the variation pattern type determination table 136A for non-reach shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, for the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA 1-5, “1” in the reach determination random number MR <b> 2-2 for the reach determination corresponding to the total reserved storage number “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134 </ b> A. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure variation time in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 21, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, with respect to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA 3-4, super PA 3-8, and super PB 3-4, for example, The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern that executes the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is set in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of the normal CA 2-1 and the super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Further, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (C). ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the effect symbol being in the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  Next, each random number used in the effect control process in the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. On the effect control board 80, for example, a random number circuit (not shown) or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. FIG. 22 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop at the time of slipping / development chance Random value SR3 for determining symbols, Random value SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, Random values SR6-1 to SR6 for determining first to third specific effect patterns -3, random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, random values SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns, and random values for determining various probable promotion effects to be executed during variable display Numerical data indicating each of SR9-1 to SR9-4 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit mounted on the effect control board 80 includes these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3. Any numerical data indicating all or part of SR9-1 to SR9-4 may be used. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR9-1 to SR9-4 May be counted. When the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR6. Numerical data indicating all of −1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3, SR9-1 to SR9-4 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as finalized effect symbols that are variable display results of the effect symbols. , A random value used to determine the effect symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each “right” effect symbol display area. Here, the final stop symbols are three effect symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when the variable display of the effect symbols ends. That is. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” effect symbol display area, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random number value used to determine the combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each effect symbol display area as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random values SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specified corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, and “intro”. It is a random value used to determine the production pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and a value in the range of “1” to “150” is used. Take. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The random value SR9-1 for determining the execution of the probable change promotion effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the probable change promotion effect during the change display of the effect symbol, and is “1” to “100”. Takes a range value. In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the probable change promotion effect, immediately before the change display of the effect symbol is ended (for example, 10 seconds before and 1 second before the change display of the effect symbol is ended). Probability promotion effect is executed during In this embodiment, in the probability variation promotion effect, first, the left middle right effect symbol is temporarily stopped with a non-probability variable symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right effect symbols are aligned with the same even number of symbols). Next, based on the player's operation using the operation buttons 120, an effect of switching the temporarily stopped effect symbol once or multiple times is performed. Then, when it is detected that the operation has been performed more than the number of notification conditions (in this example, 1 to 10 times) set in advance as a predetermined notification condition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol (left middle right) When the effect is switched to a combination of symbols with the same odd number of symbols), it is informed that it is a probable big hit (notice is given as if 恰 was promoted to a probable big hit).

  The random value SR9-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before the probable promotion effect is the temporary stop symbol (“222”, “444” displayed when the probable promotion effect is started when it is determined to execute the probable promotion effect. , “666” or “888”, which is a random number value), and takes a value in the range of “1” to “157”. The random number value SR9-3 for determining the probability variation promotion number is a random value for determining the number of notification conditions, which is a notification condition for notifying that the probability variation is a big hit when it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect. Yes, taking a value in the range of “1” to “79”. In this embodiment, the number of notification conditions is determined to be any number of 1 to 10 times. The random number value SR9-4 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the probability change promotion effect is used to determine the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol that is switched in response to the detection of the operation of the operation button 120 by the player during the execution of the probability change promotion effect. Is a random value used in the above, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “157”.

  The ROM 112 mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 112 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (D), a table for determining a definitive effect design to be one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chance items HC1 to HC8. Final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 23A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes a random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C is a final final stop symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area among the fixed effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. This is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol, and the like.

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a left / right turn determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 24. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. 3 is made up of determination data assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B, the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized design is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 4A, the portion that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 4 (C), random numbers SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are displayed in the portions that become the chances of success TC1 to TC4, and in the portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance item TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 23 (D) shows the final display in the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the specific effect “end of development opportunity” is executed. Based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, the combination of the confirmed effect symbols that become the stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined as one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, for example, as tables for determining a definite effect symbol to be a reach-losing combination. Yes. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 26A is a left final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area among the finalized symbol patterns that are the reach-losing combination. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area, are determined based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A has a rendering symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 26 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- serving as a confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area among the determined effect symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The In other words, in the variable display of effect symbols, the effect symbols start to change in the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized design symbol that is the variable display result of the production symbol is stopped, the “left” and “right” production symbol display areas other than the “medium” production symbol display area where the production symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to stop in the “medium” effect symbol display area. The difference (design difference) between the displayed middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a definite effect symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, depending on the case of any one of the fluctuation patterns of 5 to super PA3-8. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, a final stop symbol shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C is used as a table for determining a definite effect symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the odd chances TC1 to TC4. Determination tables 163A to 163C are included. The first final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as a non-probable variable symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when a normal big hit is achieved. This table is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The first final stop symbol determination table 163A is a symbol of an even number that has the same random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. It consists of data for determination assigned to the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”.

  The second final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 27 (B) has “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbols as probability variation symbols when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit. Reference is made to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are stopped and displayed in the display area based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table. The second final stop symbol determination table 163B has the symbols of the even symbols in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. It consists of decision data to be assigned to numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” or odd symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”. ing.

  The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27 (C) has a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-2, FZ4- in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. 3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined effect symbols that is 3 to one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C shown in FIGS. 28A to 28C as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. It is. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A shows that the specific effect pattern is slipped TP1 based on the first specific effect pattern determination random number SR6-1 when the “slip” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special A random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific production patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. .

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, the effects of “left” and “right” are changed. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the effect symbol is displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area by rapidly changing the effect symbol again in the “right” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a high speed, and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the “Left” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, the effect symbol display areas of “left” and “right” After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “RIGHT” is re-varied to a low speed and then stopped and displayed in the “RIGHT” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas are displayed. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a low speed, and then the effect is stopped and displayed in the “Left” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 28B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super A random value SR6 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as a change pattern of PF1-1 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, and then re-variation (pseudo-variation). The all-revariation display operation to be performed is performed once before the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the specific effect pattern to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific effect pattern determination table 164B, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is determined. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28C indicates the specific effect pattern in the intro TP3 based on the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted into intro TP3. -1 to intro TP3-3 are made up of determination data to be assigned to specific production patterns.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, the variation pattern is plural depending on whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. The assignment of the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to the kinds of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to 1 when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to 2 when it is determined to be intro TP3-2. If 3 is determined, it is set to 3. When the previous effect buffer value is 1, the intro TP3-1 is not assigned the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern, and when the previous effect buffer value is 2, the intro When the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to TP3-2 and the previous effect buffer value is 3, for determining the third specific effect pattern for intro TP3-3. No random number SR6-3 is assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 29A to 29D are used as tables for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the “slip” specific effect is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development chance temporary according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the effect symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In response to “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shows the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4. Contains decision data to allocate.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, as shown in FIG. 30A to FIG. 30D, a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily displayed when the “simulated ream” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D to be shown are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, and the temporary stop symbol one time before that Becomes “1” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the stop display is displayed (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is displayed twice before (pseudo continuous variation). By the time of execution of the pseudo continuous variation in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variation of the production symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the temporary stop display in the “right” effect symbol display area The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area, are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and right temporary stop symbol KZ2-, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. 2. It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 and special PG1-3, when the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is "2" In addition, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the right temporary stop symbol, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. KZ3-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that becomes the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" effect symbol display area. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” production Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" effect symbol display area, "middle" Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 30B are the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area, respectively. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-. 3 is composed of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of three. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 30C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 30D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, the pseudo continuous symbol TP2-1 to the pseudo continuous symbol TP2-3 by the specific effect pattern. Depending on the number of executions of the change, any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 may be used as the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Can be determined.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM 112, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 32 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. 168 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shows the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. Yes.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type. In the notice pattern type determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5 -3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, depending on the case of a variation pattern other than these variation patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is It is composed of determination data assigned to the notice pattern types of no notice or notice CY1 to CY3.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, Corresponding to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 7 and 8) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as super PB 4-3 and super PB 5-3, a random value SR7 for determining a notice pattern type is set. All are assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Intro”, the effect display in the specific effect is started within a short time after the effect symbols start to change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Is started and a notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, when a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, a random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned so that there is no notice at all times, thereby “intro” The notice effect in which the specific effect of "" and the execution period overlap can be prevented from being executed.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 as tables for determining any of a plurality of types of notification patterns. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern determination table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A determines the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without any notice, or for determining data assigned to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171B is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 without the notice or according to the variation pattern. Has been.

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, the notice pattern determination table 171C has no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP3-1 to notice YP3 based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C determines the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without any notice, or for determining data assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the operation of the operation button 120 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and then the notice YP3-1 to the notice is given in response to the operation button 120 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3, if the operation button 120 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 120 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 36, the random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Of these, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the production symbol is the reach state, a smaller number of random values SR8-3 than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7, without notice Assigned to. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In the other variation patterns that reach the reach state, the random display value SR8− for determining the third notice pattern depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). The assignment of 3 is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, a variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed is more noticeable than when the variable display state of the effect symbol is a reach pattern. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. Higher reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”) is higher, while the proportion of execution of the variable display mode of the effect symbol is a reachable variation pattern. The ratio of executing a high-priority notice effect is low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 112 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 37A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 37B, and various effect control pattern tables shown in FIG. 182 and the like are included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the effect symbol is started until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable effect display operation of the effect symbol, an effect display operation in the reach effect, and an effect display operation in the specific effect as the symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 37 (B), data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. However, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations corresponding to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notices CYP1-1 to CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. . Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 displays the character image MC101 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC102 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 displays the character image MC101 and the character image MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 displays the character images MC101 to MC103 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. . The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect Exit. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. After switching to the effect image, the notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. -2 notice effect control pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 120 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state and the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, data CRD1-1 to CRD1-17 of effect control patterns corresponding to each round are prepared as effect control patterns during hit control.

  The RAM 113 mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 39, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 39 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 40 and 41 show main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high-power signal is not output. By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed at the time of power-on that is not the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is performed. Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and issues a power failure recovery designation command for designating notification of power failure recovery in accordance with the contents. Processing to transmit to the sub board (production control board) is executed (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit confirmation process for confirming the state of the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 (step S95). In the random number circuit confirmation process, when the random number circuit is built in the gaming machine 1, the CPU 56 sets the random number circuit (for example, starts the operation of the random number circuit). Further, the CPU 56 monitors a random number confirmation signal output from the random number circuit for a predetermined time. The random number confirmation signal is ON when the clock signal generation circuit built in the random number circuit normally outputs the internal clock signal, and otherwise (for example, when the level of the internal clock signal decreases) Will be off). If the CPU 56 detects the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 and notifies the random circuit error of the main board 31. A process of transmitting a main board error designation command for designating to the sub board is executed. If the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal is not detected continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that the random number circuit is operating normally, and proceeds to step S15 as it is.

  Note that the random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers may be built in the gaming machine 1 or may be provided externally to the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the random number circuit 503 is built in one chip (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560) together with the ROM 54 and the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display symbol random number update process (step S17) and the initial value determination random number update process (step S18). When the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 disables the interrupt (step S16), and when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are finished, The interrupt is permitted (step S19).

  The display symbol random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol indicator 8. In this embodiment, a random number value MR2-2 for reach determination, a random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination, and the like are used as display design random numbers. In this embodiment, these random number values can be updated at random by, for example, using a refresh register to vary the update target and the addition value at the time of update. By doing so, the variation pattern used for the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined more randomly, and the interest in the game can be improved. The display symbol random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display symbol random number.

  The initial value determining random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number. The initial value determining random number is the initial value of a count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a normal symbol determining random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol. It is a random number for determining the value. Further, for example, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR2-2 for determining a reach, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determining When there is a random number to be updated by software among the random number value MR4 for use, the random number for determining the initial value of the counter value for generating the random number is also the initial value determining random number. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the interrupt is disabled. The display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are described later. This is to avoid contention with the process in the timer interrupt process because the process is also executed (that is, the same process is also executed in steps S25 and S26 of the timer interrupt process). That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S17 and S18 and the counter value for generating the display symbol random number and the initial value determining random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processes of steps S17 and S18.

  As described above, a game store clerk or the like can easily perform initialization processing by starting power supply to the gaming machine (eg, turning on the power switch) while the clear switch is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Next, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the switch circuit 58, and the state of these is determined (switch processing). : Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs display control processing for outputting and clearing the DG signal to various displays such as the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator. Execute (Step S22). Next, the CPU 56 executes an abnormal winning notification process for notifying that an abnormal winning to the special winning opening has been detected (step S23). Specifically, the count switch 23 is turned on in spite of the fact that it is before opening the special winning opening in the special symbol process process described later (specifically, in the process of steps S300 to S303 described later). Is detected, it is determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has been detected, and control is performed to notify.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (random number update process: step S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number (initial value determining random number updating process: step S25). Furthermore, CPU56 performs the process which updates the count value of the counter for producing | generating a display symbol random number (display symbol random number update process: step S26).

  When the random number update process, the initial value determination random number update process, and the display symbol random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (effect symbol command control process). : Step S29). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on a detection signal from the count switch 23 and the like (step S31). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the count switch 23 being turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a test terminal process which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S32). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S33: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in the number of pending storages (step S34).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag. A symbol display control process is performed (step S35). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag is set in the special symbol process, the CPU 56 outputs the output every 0.2 seconds. The display control data value set in the buffer is incremented by one. Instead of using the start flag and the end flag, the CPU 56 may update the value of the display control data based on the value of the special symbol process flag. For example, when the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (1 in this embodiment), the CPU 56 sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the value of the display control data may be incremented by one every 0.2 seconds until 3). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Then, when the end flag is set or the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 displays the stop symbol of the special symbol determined in the special symbol process process as the first special symbol display. Is displayed on the display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S36).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S37). In this case, when the gaming state is a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 1 indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. Further, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 2 indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer.

  In the case where the status indicator display process is executed at a time other than when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, the status indicator 2 indicating that the time is short is displayed only when the gaming state is the time short state. You may do it. By doing so, even if the game state is internally determined to be a probabilistic state, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the probable state is a promising state. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S21 to S37 (except for steps S30 and S32) correspond to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S38) and ends the process.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). The game control microcomputer 560 is provided with a first start port switch 13a or a second start for detecting that a game ball has won a first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6 in the special symbol process. If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is made. If it has occurred (step S311), after performing the start port switch passing process (step S312), any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state. If the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  In step S311, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the bit corresponding to the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is on in the input data input from the input port, for example. You may check. Further, for example, in the switch process (see step S21), the flag is set based on the fact that the first start winning port 13 or the second start port switch 14a is turned on twice in succession, and the game control The microcomputer 560 may confirm whether or not the flag is set in step S311.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The variation pattern of variable display of special symbols (corresponding to the variation time here) is determined in advance according to the values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for variation pattern extraction extracted at the time of starting winning. Select from multiple types of variation patterns. Further, control is performed to transmit information for instructing a variation pattern (a variation pattern command, that is, a variable display pattern command) to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  In this embodiment, each random number value is extracted when a start prize is generated. However, a random value for determining a variation pattern such as a random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination or a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. May be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing of variation pattern determination (see steps S331 and S333)). By doing so, even if a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 at the same timing, the change pattern is determined at the start timing of the change. By reading the random number value, the read random number value can be made different, and the fluctuation display can be performed with different fluctuation patterns. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the production variations of variable display of special symbols.

  Special symbol variation process (step S302): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) Is controlled to shift to a value (3 in this example) according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to step S305.

  Large winning opening open process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-hit opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Processing such as checking whether there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  Pre-opening process for small hits (step S308: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, Etc.), and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big winning opening. The execution time of the process during the hit release is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) according to step S309. However, in the case of starting a round, the process for opening a small hit game is a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S308. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) according to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control to end the small hit gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 45A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 45A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 45 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2-start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, the display of the special symbol corresponding to the larger one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed, and the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are executed. When the stored number is the same, the variable display of the special symbol with the earlier winning order set in the reserved storage specific information storage area is executed, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory are always displayed. When priority is given to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the larger one of the numbers, there is no need for the reserved storage specific information storage area. In addition, depending on whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short-time state, priority is given to the variable display of any special symbol, or the variable display of one of the predetermined special symbols is displayed. When always prioritizing execution, there is no need for the reserved storage specific information storage area. By doing so, the required capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S3). Step S215).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start opening winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating the total reserved memory number based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S218). In addition, you may transmit a pending | holding memory | storage number notification command before a 1st start opening winning designation | designated command.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and random value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed ( Step S225).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start opening winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a pending storage count notification command based on the value of the total pending storage count counter (step S228). In addition, you may transmit a pending | holding memory | storage number notification command before a 2nd start opening winning designation | designated command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29).

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer are separately provided is described as an example, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common. A reserved storage number buffer may be provided. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a common reserved memory number buffer provided in common for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As shown in FIG. 46, the common reserved storage number buffer includes eight areas obtained by combining the reserved storage specifying information storage area and the random value storage area. In the common reserved storage number buffer, consecutive addresses are assigned to the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area.

  When using the common reserved memory number buffer, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S213, and then replaces the process in step S214 with the first reserved memory in the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicating “first” in the specific information storage area is executed. Further, after incrementing the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S223, the CPU 56 replaces the process in step S224 with the reserved information specifying information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicating “second” is executed. Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the position of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved memories (which may be obtained by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number each time). By updating, data is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer.

  When specifying the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer, for example, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data to be stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory (that is, hold A value obtained by adding one storage specific information storage area) is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 46, two data storage areas, a reserved storage specific information storage area and a random value storage area, are provided in one common reserved storage number buffer. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one area of the reserved storage specific information storage area) to a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, when the total number of reserved memories is 3, as shown in FIG. 46, the reserved memory specifying information storage area corresponding to the offset value + 7 (a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories 3 and adding 1). Set the data to. In this case, when the process of step S214 is performed, the data indicating “first” is set in the reserved storage specifying information storage area, and when the process of step S224 is performed, the data indicating “second” is specified as the reserved storage. Set in the information storage area. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, the reserved storage specific information storage area and the two random number storage areas (for example, for the random value MR1 for the special figure display result determination and for the jackpot type determination) When a total of three data storage areas (for random number MR2-1) are provided, 1 is added to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by three (that is, one area for the reserved storage specific information storage area) The obtained value may be obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer may be updated according to the obtained offset value.

  When the initial position of the pointer for designating the address of the data storage destination is the first area of the common reserved memory number buffer (the reserved storage specific information storage area for the reserved storage 1 shown in FIG. 46), the CPU 56 The value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data stored in the common reserved memory number buffer for one reserved memory may be obtained as the offset value of the address. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 46, a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories may be obtained as the address offset value. Then, the CPU 56 may perform control so that the pointer is updated by setting the position of the pointer to the position moved by the offset value from the initial position. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, the reserved storage specific information storage area and the two random number storage areas (for example, for the random value MR1 for the special figure display result determination and for the jackpot type determination) When a total of three data storage areas for the random number MR2-1) are provided, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved storages by three may be obtained as an address offset value.

  In addition, the CPU 56 replaces the processing of steps S215 and S225 with each random number value (random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random number value MR2-2 for reach determination. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern) are extracted and stored in the random value storage area at the head of the free area of the common reserved storage number buffer. Specifically, after setting the data in the reserved storage specific information storage area, the CPU 56 updates the position of the pointer that designates the address by one, and stores the random value in the random value storage area at the address pointed to by the updated pointer. Is stored. Note that the CPU 56 may perform the same processing for the number of types of random number values to be stored.

  47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 first confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (step S1501). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is “0” based on the total reserved memory number count value or the like. Is determined (step S1501).

  If the total reserved storage number is “0”, the CPU 56 executes a demo display setting process for producing a customer waiting demonstration (step S1502). Specifically, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a demonstration display flag indicating that a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed is set. If it is set, the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is. If not set, the CPU 56 sets a demonstration display flag and transmits a demonstration display command for designating display of a customer waiting demonstration to the production control microcomputer 100.

  If the total reserved memory number is not “0”, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (step S1503). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not both the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter are 1 or more. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the stored number counter is larger than the value of the first reserved stored number counter. If the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1507. If the second reserved memory number is not larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (step S1504). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not both the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter are 1 or more. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the stored number counter is larger than the value of the second reserved stored number counter. If the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1506.

  In steps S1503 and S1504, if either the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 displays a special symbol variation display corresponding to the non-zero reserved memory number. Control to run. For example, if the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 controls to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more and the first reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 controls to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

  If the first reserved memory number is not larger than the second reserved memory number (that is, if the first reserved memory number is equal to the second reserved memory number), the CPU 56 determines the reserved specific area (see FIG. 45A). It is confirmed whether or not the first data among the data set to “1” is data indicating “first” (step S1505).

  When the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (Y in step S1504), or when the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S1505) ), The CPU 56 stores data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Setting is performed (step S1506).

  When the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (Y in step S1503), or the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, “second”). (N in step S1505), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer (step S1507).

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S1503 to S1507, the CPU 56 gives priority to the variable display of the second special symbol when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number. Control is performed so as to execute variable display of one special symbol. Further, when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 performs control so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. As described above, by controlling so that the variation display of the special symbol having the larger number of reserved memories is executed with priority, the situation where an invalid start winning is generated is reduced.

  Note that, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first start winning opening 13 is easy to start winning, and when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, the second starting winning opening 14 is configured to easily start winning. If it is determined that the total number of reserved memories is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state or the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set. May be. If the probability change flag or the time reduction flag is set, the process may proceed to step S1507 on the condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol may be preferentially executed. . If the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are not set, the process may proceed to step S1506 on condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0, and the change display of the first special symbol may be preferentially executed. . By doing so, it is possible to preferentially execute the change display of the special symbol that tends to accumulate the reserved memory according to the gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start winning occurs.

  Further, for example, the variable display of the second special symbol may always be executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, or the first special is always provided on condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display of a symbol.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S1508). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. Numeric values (specifically, numeric data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type) are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value (specifically, stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer). Specifically, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1509). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted. At this time, the CPU 56 deletes the oldest data indicated by the special symbol pointer from the data set in the reserved specific area, and shifts the contents of each reserved specific area. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 deletes the oldest “first” data set in the hold specific area, and sets each hold specific area. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 deletes the oldest “second” data set in the reserved specific area and displays the contents of each reserved specific area. shift.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S1510), and transmits a reserved memory number notification command based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter after the subtraction (step S1511).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the special figure display result determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S1512). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit” The first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A is selected and set. In this case, for example, in the process of step S1512, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 54 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in (B) is selected and set. In this case, for example, in the processing of step S1512, the storage address (first address) of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 54 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in step S1512 to thereby read the random number value for special figure display result determination read out in step S1508. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data (step S1513). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is on. If the probability variation flag is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag on shown in FIG. Determine. Further, if the probability variation flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag off shown in FIG. By doing so, when the gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that a big hit is made at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data (Y in step S1513), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that the big hit is determined to be in an on state (step S1514). Next, the CPU 56 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S1515). Then, the CPU 56 refers to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S1515 based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 read in step S1508, and determines the jackpot type as “normal”. ”,“ First probability variation ”,“ second probability variation ”, and“ surprising accuracy ”are determined (step S1516). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is “1”, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the special symbol pointer “1” shown in FIG. . When the value of the special symbol pointer is “2”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the special symbol pointer “2” shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the jackpot type buffer value to any one of “00” to “03” corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S1517 (step S1517).

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data (N in step S1513), the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random value MR1 read in step S1508 is the small hit determination. It is determined whether or not the value data matches (step S1518). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is in the on state. If the probability variation flag is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag on shown in FIG. Determine whether. If the probability variation flag is off, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination value data corresponding to the probability variation flag off shown in FIG.

  When the processing of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “2”, the small hit determination value data is assigned in the second special diagram display result determination table 130B as shown in FIG. Because it is not, it is not determined as a small hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, only when the process of step S1507 is executed and the special symbol pointer value is set to “1” (that is, only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), the small hit is determined. There is a case.

  If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the small hit determination value data (Y in step S1518), the CPU 56 sets the small hit flag indicating that the small hit is determined to be in the ON state. (Step S1519). Then, control goes to a step S1520. If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result does not match the small hit determination value data (N in step S1518), the process proceeds to step S1521.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a maximum value for the number of times of winning a prize winning opening (step S1520). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 56 sets the maximum winning opening number to 15 times when the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, or “second probability variation”. Set to “15” corresponding to the open game. In addition, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the CPU 56 sets the maximum number of big winning mouth opening times to “2” corresponding to the double open game. To do. Note that the CPU 56 may set the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening before the start of the big hit game (for example, special symbol stop processing or pre-opening of the big winning opening).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a confirmed special symbol corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result or determining the jackpot type (step S1521). As an example, if the numerical value data indicating the random number MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S1518, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S1518, the small hit symbol is displayed corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, when the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S1513, the numbers “1” and “7” that are the jackpot symbols are changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S1516. One of the special symbols shown is set as a confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, or “second probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is changed to the confirmed special symbol. Set. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command corresponding to the gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1522). In this case, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set, and if it is set, performs control to transmit a high probability state background designation command (command 9501 (H) shown in FIG. 5). Further, if the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H) shown in FIG. 5). Therefore, in this embodiment, a high-probability state background designation command is transmitted if the gaming state is a probable change state, and a normal state background designation command is transmitted if the gaming state is other than the probability variation state (normal state or short-time state). The Note that the normal state background designation command is transmitted only when the gaming state is the normal state, and if the gaming state is the short time state (for example, if the short time flag indicating that the short time state is set). The time-short state background designation command may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S1523).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S321). If the big hit flag is on (Y in step S321), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time reduction state (specifically, whether the probability change flag is set or the time reduction As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the jackpot fluctuation is used as a usage table for determining one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. Any one of the pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set (step S322). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  When the big hit flag is off (N in step S321), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S323). If the small hit flag is on (Y in step S323), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time reduction state (specifically, whether the probability variation flag is set, As a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 13D, based on whether the time reduction flag is set, the variation pattern for small hits shown in FIG. Any one of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set (step S324). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  When the small hit flag is off (N in step S323), that is, when it is out of play, it is based on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state (specifically, Based on whether the probability variation flag is set or the time reduction flag is set), in accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 14D, for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state As the use table, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIG. 14 is selected and set (step S325).

  Next, the CPU 56 specifies the total reserved memory number by, for example, reading the count value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S326). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not there is a reach state by referring to one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S325 based on the specified total number of reserved storage and the random number MR2-2 for determination of reach. (Step S327). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR2-2 for reach determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the read random number value MR2 for reach determination. -2 determines whether or not a reach state exists.

  When the determination result indicating that the reach state is present is obtained (Y in step S328), the CPU 56 determines whether one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1 in step S328. As a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state (see FIG. 14), the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A to FIG. One of 135C is selected and set (step S329). When the determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained (N in step S328), the CPU 56 determines in step S328 that non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1. -2, use to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types depending on whether the determination result is non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2 (see FIG. 14). As the table, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIG. 17 is selected and set (step S330). Then, the process proceeds to step S331.

  Next, the CPU 56 refers to the usage table set in any one of steps S322, S324, S329, and S330 based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and sets the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. Determine (step S331). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the random number value for determining the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type is determined based on the numerical value MR3.

  In the process of step S331, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern type of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, or the second start condition is Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 8b based on the establishment, the variation pattern type determination updated by a common random counter or the like Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 that is used, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. Further, in the process of step S331, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S327, using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type is determined by a common processing module. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S331, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C (see FIGS. 18 and 19) and loss variation as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as pattern determination tables 138A and 138B (FIGS. 20 and 21) is selected and set (step S332). Next, the CPU 56 refers to the variation pattern determination table set in step S332 based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4, and thereby, among the plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in step S331. Either one is determined (step S333). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and reads the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern thus read out. Based on this, the variation pattern is determined.

  In the process of step S333, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, or the second start condition is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the second special symbol display unit 8b determines the variation pattern of the production symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is updated by a common random counter or the like. One of a plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in step S331 is determined using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4. Further, in the process of step S333, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S327, a plurality of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 used for variation pattern determination. Can be determined to be any of the types. As an example, in the process of step S333, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Next, the CPU 56 starts changing the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer (step S334). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S35 is set. Note that in the special symbol display control process of step S35 without using the start flag or the end flag, when the variation of the special symbol is controlled based only on the value of the special symbol process flag, in step S334, the CPU 56 A flag indicating whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed may be set. Further, the CPU 56 sets the special figure variation time in the variation time timer according to the determination result of the variation pattern in step S333 (step S335).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs settings for transmitting various commands for use in starting the special symbol variation (step S336). For example, when the special symbol pointer value is 1, the CPU 56 performs control to sequentially transmit the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the display result command from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. When the special symbol pointer value is 2, the CPU 56 performs control to sequentially transmit the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the display result command from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. In step S336, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the third display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the fourth display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the fifth display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the sixth display result command among the display result commands shown in FIG.

  By executing the process of step S336, the CPU 56 transmits a change start command and a change pattern designation command within the same timer interrupt. Then, after transmitting the variation start command and the variation pattern designation command, the CPU 56 transmits the display result command and the pending storage number notification command in every 2 msec (or every 4 msec). By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 100 can reliably receive at least a command related to the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs the process of step S336, and executes the effect symbol command control process (see step S29) according to the setting of step S336, thereby shifting to at least the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). Whether or not and a variable display pattern (variation pattern) can be specified is transmitted. As shown in this embodiment, the command transmission means may transmit the variation pattern command that can identify the variation pattern and the display result command that can identify the display result as separate commands. Only one command (for example, a variation pattern command that can specify both the variation pattern and the display result) may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S302) (step S337).

  In this embodiment, in step S327, based on the total reserved storage number, the determination process is performed using one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C illustrated in FIG. When the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memories (that is, the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is large, the frequency of executing the reach effect during the variable display is reduced. Thus, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined.

  In this embodiment, in step S331, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table set in step S330 is used in accordance with the determination result in which the presence or absence of the reach state is determined based on the total number of reserved memories in step S327. When the variation pattern type is determined and the variation pattern is finally determined in step S333, the variation pattern for the shortened variation is determined when the total number of reserved memories is large when the reach effect is not performed and the reach effect is not executed. Is done. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of reserved memories is 3 or 4, it is determined to be non-reach PA1-2, which is a variation pattern for shortening, and the total number of reserved memories is When the number is 5 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PA1-3 that is a variation pattern for shortening. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state and the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PB1-2 which is a shortening variation pattern. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state and the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 8, it is determined to be non-reach PC1-2 that is a variation pattern for shortening.

  In this embodiment, the special figure display result is obtained from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter at the time of winning the game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. All of random number MR1 for determination, random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination, random value MR2-2 for reach determination, random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and random value MR4 for variation pattern determination Although the case where it is extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer is shown, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are started. You may make it extract not at the time of winning a prize but at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol.

  For example, when the random number values MR3 and MR4 are extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the CPU 56 performs the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch in the start port switch passing process. When ON of 14a is detected (see steps S211 and S221), a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result and a random for determining a big hit type are selected from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Only the numerical value MR2-1 and the random number MR2-2 for reach determination are extracted and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (see steps S215 and S225). In step S331 of the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 extracts the variation pattern type determination random number MR3 from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, and extracts the extracted variation pattern type determination. The variation pattern type is determined based on the random number MR3. Further, in step S333 of the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 extracts the variation pattern determination random value MR4 from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, and extracts the extracted variation pattern determination. A variation pattern is determined based on the random value MR4.

  For example, all random values including the random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination and the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination are extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer. Then, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 by chance at the same time, the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer and the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer May store the same random value. If it does so, the situation where a fluctuation display will be performed according to the same fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol which are performed after that will arise. On the other hand, as described above, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted at the start of variation, the first start winning opening 13 and the second Even if a game ball wins at the start winning opening 14 by chance, the variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol executed after that may be made different. it can.

  In this embodiment, the random number value MR2-2 for reach determination, the random value MR3 for change pattern type determination, and the random value MR4 for change pattern determination are randomly updated using, for example, a refresh register. be able to. By doing so, the variation pattern used for the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined more randomly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, first, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by 1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0), and if it has not expired (N in step S352), it remains as it is. The special symbol variation process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S303 (step S353).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation stopping process, the CPU 56 stops the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stopped symbol (step S1301). For example, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S35 to end the variation of the special symbol, and displays a stop symbol on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Control to display and display. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect symbol stop designation command (8F00 (H)) for designating stop of the variation of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1302). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1303).

  If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 56 displays the jackpot symbol after stopping the jackpot symbol on the jackpot control timer for measuring the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. Is set (step S1304). The execution time (big hit display time (eg, 3 seconds)) of the effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the game is started is set (step S1304). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1305).

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the big hit flag (step S1306), and if it is set, resets the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the time reduction counter (step S1307). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (step S1308).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1303, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the hourly flag is set (step S1309). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1313. If it is set, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the time reduction counter (step S1310) and checks whether the value after subtraction of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1311). Note that the time-count counter is a counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol and effect design variable display after the shift to the time-saving state.

  If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1313 as it is. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S1312). That is, after shifting to the time-saving state after the end of the big hit, the time-shift flag is reset and the state shifts to the normal state because the change display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1313). If the small winning flag is set (Y in step S1313), the CPU 56 stops displaying the small winning symbol on the large winning opening control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening. An execution time (small hit display time (for example, 3 seconds)) for informing the player that the small hit game is started (fanfare display effect) is set (step S1314). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1315).

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the small hit flag (step S1316). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (step S1317).

  If the small hit flag is not set in step S1313, the CPU 56 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S1318).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S461). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (step S462). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S462), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S462), the CPU 56 reads the big hit type buffer value determined in step S1516 (step S463). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read jackpot type buffer value is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S464). In this case, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” (Y in step S464), the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S465) and starts the time reduction counter in order to start control to the time reduction state. A predetermined value (for example, “100”) is set (step S466). Then, control goes to a step S470.

  If the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” in step S464 (N in step S313), a probability variation flag is set (step S467) and a time reduction flag is set to start control to the probability variation state. (Step S468). In addition, a predetermined value (for example, “100”) is set in the time reduction counter (step S469). Then, control goes to a step S470. Note that the time reduction state may be continued until the next big hit occurs without setting a predetermined value in the time reduction number counter in step S469.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S470).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 33 ms) (step S701). .

  Next, the production control CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (see FIG. 22) (step S702), and monitors the timer interrupt flag (step S703). Transition to the loop processing to be performed. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S704) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S705). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a movable member initial position control process, which is a process for setting the position of the movable member 90 provided on the right side of the effect display device 9 to the initial position (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  55 and 56 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process (step S705) in the main process. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S1611). When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads out the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S1612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 81XX (H)) for designating a variation pattern (step S1613), the effect control CPU 101 stores the EXT data of the command in the variation pattern data in the RAM. The data is stored in the area (step S1614), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (display result command: 8CXX (H)) designating a display result (step S1616), the effect control CPU 101 stores the EXT data of the command in the fluctuation pattern data in the RAM. In the area (step S1617), a display result reception flag is set (step S1618).

  If the received effect control command is a fanfare-designated effect control command (fanfare command: A0XX (H)) (step S1619), the effect control CPU 101 stores the EXT data of the command in the fanfare data storage area in the RAM. (Step S1620), and a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (step S1621).

  If the received effect control command is an ending-designated effect control command (ending command: A3XX (H)) (step S1622), the effect control CPU 101 uses the EXT data of the command as the ending data storage area in the RAM. (Step S1623), and an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S1624).

  If the received effect control command is a high-probability state background designation command (command 9501 (H)) (step S1625), the effect control CPU 101 displays a red background as the background color on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S1627).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H)) (step S1628), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a green background as the background color on the effect display device 9. Is performed (step S1629).

  When the process of steps S1625 to S1629 is executed to control the probability change state, a red background is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the effect symbol can be recognized in a state where the probability change state can be recognized. Effects such as variable display are performed. In the normal state or the short time state, a green background is displayed on the effect display device 9, and an effect such as a change display of the effect symbol is performed in a state where it can be recognized that it is not the probability change state.

  If the received effect control command is the first variation start designation command (command 8001 (H)) (step S1630), the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. A first variation start flag indicating that variation display is to be started is set (step S1631).

  If the received effect control command is the second variation start designation command (command 8002 (H)) (step S1632), the effect control CPU 101 synchronizes with the variation display of the second special symbol. A second variation start flag indicating the start of variation display is set (step S1633).

  If the received effect control command is an effect symbol stop designation command (command 8F00 (H)) (step S1634), the effect control CPU 101 designates an effect symbol stop designation indicating that the effect symbol stop designation command has been received. A reception flag is set (step S1635).

  If the received command read in step S1612 is another effect control command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1636).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variation start command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Also, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the first variation start command reception flag, the second variation start command reception flag, and the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process are set. If either the first change start command or the second change start command and the change pattern command are received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803). In addition, when it is decided to execute the probable change promotion effect, the probable change promotion effect is executed during the change display of the effect symbol.

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (production symbol stop designation command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, the variation of the production symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, the display control of the number of rounds is performed based on the display command for opening the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is being opened.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, the interval display is performed based on a display command after opening the big winning opening indicating that the big winning opening is after being opened (during closing).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800). Further, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit, and it is not notified that the probability variation big hit is in the probability variation promotion effect, an effect to notify that the probability variation big hit is in the ending effect is performed.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control for variably displaying the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  In addition, similar to the control based on the display control execution data, the effect control CPU 101 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and obtains the sound number data. Output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 58 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the display result command or data indicating the display result command from the display result command storage area (step S820). Then, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable display result is “lost” (step S821). If the variable display result is “losing” (Y in step S821), the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command or data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S822). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the specified variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” (step S823).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs a variation in which the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command executes a specific effect of "end of development chance eye". It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (step S824). As an example, if it is determined in step S823 that the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 7), “ It is determined that the fluctuation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development opportunity”.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance” (Y in step S824), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance points HC1 to HC8. The combination of the determined effect symbols is determined (step S825). As an example, in the process of step S825, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4 and FZ1- that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. 5, the combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not the execution pattern for executing the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” (N in Step S824), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final effect symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination. A non-reach symbol determination process for determining a combination is executed (step S826).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of non-reach symbol determination processing. In the non-reach symbol determination process, the production control CPU 101 first selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 23A as a use table (step S2601). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2602). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the effect symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A (step S2603). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B as a use table (step S2604). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2605). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B (step S2606).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the left and right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 24 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. It is determined which type DC1-1 is a plurality of types. Then, the production control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C as a use table according to the determined left and right outcome type (step S2607). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2608). Then, on the basis of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C (step) S2609).

  As described above, in the non-reach symbol determination process in step S826, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are referred to with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161. By determining the production symbol to be realized, the combination of the definitive production symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 5B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 5C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Nor.

  When it is determined that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (N in step S823), the effect control CPU 101 executes a reach symbol determination process for determining a combination of a definite effect symbol that becomes a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination. (Step S827).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reach symbol determination processing. In the reach symbol determination process, the production control CPU 101 first selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 26A as a use table (step S2701). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2702). Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the same effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is obtained. Determine (step S2703). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 26B as a use table (step S2704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the third final stop symbol determining random number SR1-3 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2705). Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference (step S2706).

  As described above, in the reach symbol determination process of step S827, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “left” other than the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. The effect symbols that are the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” (N in step S821), the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit. It is determined whether the type is “surprise” or any other one (step S828). When the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (Y in step S828), the presentation control CPU 101 in step S822. It is determined whether the read variation pattern is any of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S829).

  As shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. Therefore, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is any of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-4 (Y in step S829), the process proceeds to the process in step S824, and in steps S825 and S826. By one of the processes, the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined. If it is determined in step S829 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is processed in step S824. If the variation pattern is 4 (see FIG. 8), it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 (N in step S829), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3. It is determined whether the pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns or other patterns (step S830).

  As shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3 specify that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state. Therefore, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the variation pattern is one of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 (Y in step S830), the process proceeds to the process in step S827 to configure the reach combination. The finalized design to be the final stop symbol is determined.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is other than the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-3 (N in step S830), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the designated variation pattern is the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3. One of the fluctuation patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 8, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3 are to set the combination of the definitive effect symbols resulting in the variable display result of the effect symbols to be any one of the chance chance items TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4. It is specified. The effect control CPU 101 corresponds to the designation of any of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, and the final effect that becomes the final stop symbol constituting one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. A combination of symbols is determined (step S831). As an example, in the process of step S831, a sudden probability change final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27C is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1 that becomes one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 by suddenly referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C at the time of probability change. The combination of FZ4-2 and FZ4-3 is determined as the confirmed effect symbol. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  If the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (N in step S828), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect during the variable display of the effect symbol. The probability variation promotion effect setting process for determining is executed (step S832).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the probability variation promotion effect setting process. In the probability variation promotion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads out the variation pattern command or data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S2501). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the specified variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “super reach” (step S2502). If the variation pattern corresponds to the case of “super reach”, the process proceeds to a process of setting whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect after step S2503. If the variation pattern does not correspond to the case of “super reach”, the process is terminated as it is. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability variation promotion effect is executed when the variation display with the super reach having the variation time set to be long is performed. If the execution time of the probability change promotion effect is secured, the probability change promotion effect may be executed during the variable display with normal reach or during the variable display without reach.

  If it is a variation pattern corresponding to the case of “super reach” (Y in step S2502), the effect control CPU 101 uses, for example, a random change provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 to determine the probable promotion effect execution. Numerical data indicating the random value SR9-1 is extracted (step S2503). Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the probability change promotion effect execution determination table for determining whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR9-1, and using the probability change promotion effect execution determination table. It is determined whether or not to produce an effect (step S2504).

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a probability variation promotion effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 64, in this embodiment, when the big hit (excluding the probability change big hit) is determined and the super reach effect is executed, the probability change is displayed during the fluctuation display with a probability of 40%. Decide to execute the promotion effect. The probability change promotion effect execution determination table may be set to execute the probability change promotion effect with a higher probability (for example, 60% or 80%), and a lower probability (for example, 10% or 20%). ) May be set to execute a probable promotion effect.

  When it is decided to execute the probability change promotion effect (Y in step S2505), the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change promotion effect execution flag indicating that the probability change promotion effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol. (Step S2506). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR9-2 for determining temporary stop symbols before effect change promotion effect from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2507). . Then, the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stops before the probable change promotion effect for determining the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped before the start of the probable change promotion effect based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR9-2. Using the symbol determination table, the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped immediately before the start of the probable change promotion effect is determined (step S2508).

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop symbol determination table before a probable promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, as the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped immediately before the start of the probable change promotion effect, any non-probable variable symbol (“222”, “444”, “666” or “888”).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the designated display result is the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit (step S2509). Whether the display result is the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit can be specifically determined by confirming the display result command extracted in step S820 or the data indicating the display result command. If neither the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit is found (N in step S2509: that is, if it is a normal big hit), the processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit (Y of step S2909), the CPU 101 for effect control sets a probability variation big hit flag indicating that it is a probability variation big hit (step S2510).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 is in the probability change promotion effect when the player fails to operate the operation button 120 when the previous probability change promotion effect is executed (the operation button 120 cannot be operated more than the number of notification conditions). It is confirmed whether or not a previous operation failure flag indicating that it has not been notified that it is a probable big hit is set (step S2511). If the previous operation failure flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 selects a probability variation promotion operation number determination table (normal time) as a table for determining the number of notification conditions (step S2512). If the previous operation failure flag is set, the production control CPU 101 selects the probability variation promotion operation number determination table (when the previous operation has failed) as a table for determining the number of notification conditions (step S2513).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR9-3 for determining the probable change promotion number from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S2514). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of notification conditions based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR9-3, using the probability variation promotion operation count determination table selected in steps S2512 and S2513 (step S2515). ).

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a probability variation promotion operation count determination table. Among these, FIG. 66 (A) is a table for determining the number of probable change promotion operations (normal time) used when the previous operation failure flag is not set (normal time). FIG. 66B is a table for determining the number of probable change promotion operations (when the previous operation fails) used when the previous operation failure flag is set (when the previous operation fails). As shown in FIG. 66, in this embodiment, in step S2515, the production control CPU 101 determines any number of 1 to 10 times as the number of notification conditions.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), in a normal time when the previous operation failure flag is not set, a ratio in which a small number of notification conditions (for example, 1 to 3 times) is determined. (In this example, there are three determination values assigned to the number of notification conditions 1 to 3 each), and a large number of notification conditions (for example, 8 to 10 times). (In this example, there are 10 decision values assigned to the number of notification conditions 8 to 10). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), at the time of the previous operation failure in which the previous operation failure flag is set, the ratio at which a small number of notification conditions (for example, 1 to 3 times) is determined is determined. (In this example, the determination values assigned to the number of notification conditions 1 to 3 are set to 10), and the number of notification conditions is large (for example, 8 to 10 times). ) Is determined (in this example, there are three determination values each assigned to the number of notification conditions 8 to 10). By setting the probability variation promotion operation count determination table in this way, the player has failed to operate the operation button 120 during the previous execution of the probability variation promotion effect, and the probability variation big hit is being performed during the execution of the probability variation promotion effect. When it is not notified that there is, it is possible to increase the probability that the operation difficulty level with the operation button 120 is reduced. Accordingly, the probability variation promotion effect can be executed according to the player characteristics (for example, depending on whether or not the player is skilled in the operation of the operation button 120), and is promoted to the probability variation jackpot. The interest of the player can be improved.

  When the probability change promotion effect setting process is executed, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set (step S833). If the certain change promotion effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S837. If the probability variation promotion effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display result is a normal jackpot (step S834). Whether or not the display result is usually a big hit can be determined by checking the display result command extracted in step S820 or the data indicating the display result command.

  When the fluctuation display result is normally a big hit, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the combination of the determined effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols using the first final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. Step S835). As an example, in the process of step S835, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the first final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the first final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1 and FZ3 that become even symbols that are non-probable variable symbols. -2 and FZ3-3 are determined as the confirmed effect symbols. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  When the fluctuation display result is not the normal big hit (N in Step S834: That is, when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit), the effect control CPU 101 performs the second final stop symbol shown in FIG. The determination table 163B is used to determine the combination of the confirmed effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols (step S836). As an example, in the process of step S836, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the second final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the first final stop symbol determining random number SR1-1 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the second final stop symbol determination table 163B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1 and FZ3- that become odd symbols that are probability variation symbols. 2, The combination of FZ3-3 is determined as a definite effect design. Then, control goes to a step S837.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (step S837). FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S837. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern including a specific effect (step S3501). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect (N in step S3501), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined that the variation pattern includes a specific effect (Y in step S3501), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo train”, “intro”, or other specific effects. It is determined whether it exists (step S3502). If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as a use table ( Step S3503). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set, and in the case of the “intro” specific effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28C is set.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S3504). As an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern, for example, from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is set to one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S3503. decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract numerical data. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the specific effect pattern is set to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S3503. Decide on. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses a numerical value indicating the third specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-3 from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract data. In this case, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S3505). If the specific effect is “intro” (Y in step S3505), it is determined in step S3504. In accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3, the previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in specific effect pattern determination table 164C (step S3506). For example, when the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 1. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-2 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 2. If the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-3 is determined in step S3504, the previous effect buffer value is updated to 3.

  As described above, by executing the processing of step S3506, intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” Each time it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns, it can be updated so that the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the determined specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is set. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. In the process of step S3504, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 28C is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S3502 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, or “intro”, or if it is determined in step S3505 that the specific effect is other than “intro”, the process of step S3506 is executed. After that, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the specific effect is any one of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or a specific effect other than these (step S3507). ). If it is a specific effect other than “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “development chance” (N in step S3507), the specific effect setting process is terminated. If it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (Y in step S3507), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined (step S3508). Then, the specific effect setting process ends.

  In the process of step S3508, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the table selection setting shown in FIG. 29E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S3504. Any one of the stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random value SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the effect symbol which becomes any of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, in the case of a specific production of “pseudo-continuous”, the production control CPU 101 first sets the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation to a constant M based on the specific production pattern determined in step S3504. To do. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A is selected and set as a use table, while the variation pattern is super PA 3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super PF1-1, and special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is obtained. The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 updates the variable N by adding 1, and determines whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  As described above, if the updated variable N matches the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process of step S3508. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 updates the variable N by adding 1, and determines whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  As described above, if the updated variable N matches the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process of step S3508. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 by such processing, the processing in step S3508 is terminated.

  As yet another example, in the case of a specific development of “Development Chance”, the production control CPU 101 selects and sets the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 32 as a usage table. Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect setting process (step S838). FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S838. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first selects and sets the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 33 as a use table (step S3701). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S3702). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S3702, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170, there is no notice or the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. Either one is determined (step S3703). In this case, when it is determined that there is no previous notice (N in step S3704), the production control CPU 101 ends the advance notice setting process.

  When any of the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 is determined (Y in step S3704), the effect control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 34 according to the decided notice pattern type. 35, one of the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 35 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 36 is selected and set as a use table (step S3705). That is, when the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is determined in step S3703, the notice pattern determination table 171A is set, and when the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern determination table 171B is set. When the CY3 notice pattern type is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines any one of a plurality of types of notice patterns (step S3706), and ends the notice effect setting process.

  In the processing of step S3706, for example, when the notice control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern type as notice CY1, for example, from the random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, the first notice pattern determination is performed. Numerical data indicating the random value SR8-1 is extracted. Then, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR8-1, the notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S3705 is referred to, so that the notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is not given. Decide on one.

  As another example, when the notice control CPU 101 determines the notice pattern type as notice CY2, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like may be used to determine the second notice pattern determination disorder. Numerical data indicating the numerical value SR8-2 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S3705, the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 are displayed. Decide on one.

  As yet another example, when the notice pattern type is determined as the notice pattern CY3, the effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example, to determine a random value for determining the third notice pattern. Numerical data indicating SR8-3 is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR8-3, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S3705, there is no notice or the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. Decide on one.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 performs the production according to the setting contents of the probability variation promotion production setting process (see step S832), the specific production setting process (see step S837), and the announcement production setting process (see step S838) and the variation pattern. A process table for variable display of symbols (variable display process table) is selected (step S839). In this embodiment, for example, a variation display process table used when it is determined in advance that the probability variation promotion effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol, and a variation display used when it is determined that the probability variation promotion effect is not executed. Process table is prepared, and if it is decided to execute the probability variation promotion effect in the probability variation promotion effect setting process, the process table for variation display for executing the probability variation promotion effect is selected in step S839. For example, when the production control CPU 101 decides to execute the probability variation promotion effect, the performance control CPU 101 executes the probability variation promotion effect after executing the reach effect with a short effect period compared to the case where the probability variation promotion effect is not executed. The process table for change display for executing the certain change promotion effect is selected. In this case, until the temporary stop symbol determined in step S2508 is temporarily stopped and displayed from the variation display of the effect symbol (including the reach effect) using the variation display process table selected in step S839 in the effect symbol variation processing described later. Will be performed. When the execution period of the probable promotion effect is reached, the temporary stop symbol display process table (temporary stop symbol display process table) and the symbol switching effect process table (design switching effect process) in the effect symbol changing process Tables) are sequentially switched (steps S1844, S1860, S1868), and the probable promotion effect is executed based on the switched process table.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer corresponding to the effect execution data 1 in the selected process data (step S840). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 27L, 27R as effect parts is executed (step S841). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speakers 27L and 27R.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S842), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). (Step S843).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the processes of steps S825, S826, S827, S831, S835, and S836 so that identification information derived and displayed as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the effect display device 9 is displayed. An identification information determining means for determining from among a plurality of types is realized. It should be noted that the identification information determining means may also be configured for a portion where the CPU 56 determines a temporary stop symbol such as step S3508.

  FIG. 69 to FIG. 71 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the effect symbol stop designation reception flag is set (step S1831). The effect symbol stop designation reception flag is set based on the reception of the effect symbol stop designation command in the command analysis process (see step S1635). If the effect symbol stop designation reception flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1845. If not set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S1832). If the variable time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1845. In step S1845, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value indicating the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an effect symbol stop designation command has been received (see step S1831), and whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (refer to step S1832) is determined. Although the case of shifting to the variation stop process is shown, it may be determined only whether or not an effect symbol stop designation command has been received, and the effect symbol variation stop process may be shifted to. In this case, if the effect symbol stop designation reception flag is not set in step S1831, the CPU 56 may proceed to step S1833 as it is without executing step S1832.

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S1833) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S1834).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set (step S1835). If the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability change promotion effect flag indicating that the execution of the probability change promotion effect has already ended during the change display of the effect symbol is set. Confirmation is made (step S1836). If the probability change promotion effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability change promotion effect flag indicating that the probability change promotion effect is currently being executed is set (step S1837). If the probability variation promotion effect flag is set, the process shifts to step S1846.

  If the probability variation promotion effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a predetermined probability variation promotion effect start time for starting the probability variation promotion effect has elapsed (step S1838). In step S <b> 1838, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the probable change promotion effect start time has elapsed when the effect symbol change time is 10 seconds remaining, based on the value of the change time timer.

  When the probability change promotion effect start time has not elapsed (N in step S1838), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speakers 27L, 27R according to the contents of the process data n for variable display. ) Is executed (step S1839). In this case, for example, according to the contents of the process data n for change display included in the process table for change display included in the change display process table for execution of the probability change promotion effect selected in step S839 of the effect symbol change start process, the change display of the effect symbols (reach effect is displayed). To the temporary stop display of the temporary stop symbol determined in step S2508 is performed.

  Even if the probability change promotion effect execution flag is not set in step S1835 (that is, when the probability change promotion effect is not executed), the process proceeds to step S1839, where the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data n for variable display. Executed. In step S1839, specifically, control for executing the effect symbol variation display and the reach effect is performed. In addition, when it is determined to execute a specific effect (for example, an effect of slipping or pseudo-continuous) or a notice effect, control for executing the specific effect or the notice effect is performed. In addition, when the probability variation promotion effected flag is set in step S1836 (that is, when execution of the probability variation promotion effect has already ended during the variation display of the effect symbol), the process proceeds to step S1839, Control of the effect device is executed in accordance with the contents of the stop symbol display process data n. In this case, in step S1839, an effect of temporarily stopping display (specifically, a slight fluctuation variation display) of the temporary stop symbol (see steps S1856 and S1859 described later) determined last in the probability variation promotion effect is performed. The temporary stop symbol determined last in the probable promotion effect is the final stop symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the variation display of the effect symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1840), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1841). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1842). When the processes of steps S1840 to S1842 are executed after the process of step S1839, switching between the process data for variable display or the process data for temporary stop symbol display is performed based on whether or not the process timer has timed out. Is called. In addition, when the processes of steps S1840 to S1842 are executed after the process of step S1849 described later, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched based on whether or not the process timer has timed out. In addition, when the processes of steps S1840 to S1842 are executed after the process of step S1867, which will be described later, the process data for the effect during symbol switching is switched based on whether or not the process timer has timed out.

  If the probability variation promotion effect start time has elapsed (Y in step S1838), the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation promotion effect flag (step S1843). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs temporary stop symbol display process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data) according to the temporary stop symbol (see step S2508) before the start of the probability change promotion effect determined in the probability change promotion effect setting process. And sound number data) (step S1844). That is, the effect control CPU 101 switches to the temporary stop symbol display process data for displaying the temporary stop symbol determined in step S2508. Then, the probable promotion effect is started, and according to the temporary stop symbol display process table set in step S1844, the temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in step S1848 described later.

  In step S1846, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an operation invalidation flag indicating that the operation by the operation button 120 is invalid is set. If the operation invalidation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1864.

  If the operation invalidation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a predetermined probability change promotion effect end time for ending the probability change promotion effect has elapsed (step S1847). In step S1838, for example, based on the value of the variation time timer, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the probable promotion promotion end time has elapsed when the remaining variation time of the effect symbol is 1 second.

  If the probable promotion promotion end time has not elapsed (N in step S1847), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27L) according to the contents of the temporary stop symbol display process data n. , 27R) is executed (step S1848). For example, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol is temporarily stopped (specifically, a slight fluctuation change display) and a character string such as “Press the button!” Is displayed. An effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 120. In this case, when it is the start time of the probable change promotion effect, the probable change as the temporary stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 based on the temporary stop symbol display process table switched in step S1844. The temporary stop symbol (see step S2508) before the start of the probable change promotion effect determined in the promotion effect setting process is temporarily stopped (specifically, a slight fluctuation change display). When displaying the second and subsequent temporary stop symbols after the symbol switching, the temporary stop symbol display process switched in step S1868 based on the temporary stop symbols determined in steps S1856 and S1859 described later. On the basis of the table, the second and subsequent temporary stop symbols after the symbol changeover are displayed as temporary stop (a slight fluctuation change display is displayed in the vertical direction).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the detection signal from the operation button 120 has been input (step S1849). If the detection signal from the operation button 120 is not input (that is, if there is no operation of the operation button 120 by the player), the process proceeds to step S1840. In step S1849, the effect control CPU 101 detects the rise or fall of the detection signal of the operation button 120. For example, the effect control CPU 101 stores the value of the detection signal of the operation button 120 at the time of the previous timer interruption, and detects that the detection signal of the operation button 120 has changed from OFF to ON. It is determined that a rising edge of the detection signal 120 has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S1850. Alternatively, when the production control CPU 101 detects that the detection signal of the operation button 120 has changed from on to off, it determines that the detection signal of the operation button 120 has fallen, and proceeds to step S1850. On the other hand, even when it is detected that the operation signal of the operation button 120 is turned on, when the detection signal of the operation button 120 has been on since the previous timer interruption (that is, the operation button 120 is pressed). If it continues, the process proceeds to step S1840 without proceeding to step S1850. By controlling in such a manner, it is possible to prevent a situation where the operation button 120 is continuously hit by continuously pressing the operation button 120 for a long time.

  If the detection signal from the operation button 120 is input (that is, when the player operates the operation button 120), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set. Is confirmed (step S1850). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set, the process shifts to step S1857.

  If the probability variation big hit flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the operation number counter for counting the number of times the operation button 120 is operated during the execution of the probability variation promotion effect (step S1851). . Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the operation count counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the notification condition count (see step S2515) determined in the probability variation promotion effect setting process (step S1852). If the value of the operation number counter has not reached the number of notification conditions (that is, if the predetermined notification condition for notifying that it is a probable big hit is not yet satisfied), the flow shifts to step S1857.

  If the value of the operation counter is equal to or greater than the number of notification conditions (that is, if a predetermined notification condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 101 further switches according to the temporary stop symbol currently displayed temporarily. A temporary change symbol determination table (probability change notification) for determining the temporary stop symbol (probability change symbol) to be displayed is selected (step S1853). Further, if it is not set, the production control CPU 101 sets a probability variation promotion notification flag indicating that the probability variation big hit has been notified (step S1854).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR9-4 for determining the temporary change symbol for the probable change promotion effect from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S1855). . Then, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the temporary change symbol determination table (for probability change notification) for the probability change promotion effect selected in step S1853 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR9-4, and the probability change promotion effect. The temporary stop symbol (probability variation symbol) of the effect symbol to be switched and temporarily stopped during the execution of is determined (step S1856). Then, control goes to a step S1860.

  72 and 73 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the temporary stop symbol determination table (for probability variation notification) during the probability variation promotion effect. Among these, FIG. 72 (A) is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during probability change promotion effect (for probability change notification) that is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed for temporary stop is “111”. FIG. 72B is a probability change promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table (for probability change notification) that is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed for temporary stop is “222”. FIG. 72C is a table for determining the probable change promotion effect temporary stop symbol (for probable change notification) that is selected when the temporary stop symbol that is currently temporarily displayed is “333”. FIG. 72 (D) is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during probability variation promotion effect (for probability variation notification) selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “444”. FIG. 72 (E) is a table for determining the probable change promotion effect temporary stop symbol (for probable change notification) that is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed for temporary stop is “555”. FIG. 73A is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during probability change promotion effect (for probability change notification) selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “666”. FIG. 73 (B) is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol (probability change notification) during a probable change promotion effect that is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed for temporary stop is “777”. Further, FIG. 73C is a table for determining the temporary stop symbol during probability variation promotion effect (for probability variation notification) selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed for temporary stop is “888”.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (B) and 72 (D) and FIGS. 73 (A) and 73 (C), when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as a temporary stop is a non-probable variable symbol, in step S1856, substantially the same. Any probability variation pattern (“111”, “333”, “555” or “777”) is determined by the probability.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the operation button 120 has already been operated more than the number of notification conditions and the probability variation symbol is temporarily displayed as a provisional stop symbol, if the probability variation promotion effect execution period has not yet been reached. Based on the operation performed by the operation button 120, an effect of switching and displaying the temporary stop symbol (in this example, an effect of switching and displaying the same probability variable symbol) is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 72A, when an operation with the operation button 120 is detected when the probability variation symbol “111” is already temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol, the same probability variation with a probability of 100% is performed. The symbol “111” is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), when an operation with the operation button 120 is detected when the probability variation symbol “333” is already temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol, the probability is 100%. The same probability variation pattern “333” is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 72E, when an operation with the operation button 120 is detected when the probability variation symbol “555” is already temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol, the probability is 100%. The same probability variation pattern “555” is determined. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73B, when an operation with the operation button 120 is detected when the probability variation symbol “777” is temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol, the probability is 100%. The same probability variation pattern “777” is determined. If an operation with the operation button 120 is detected when the probability variation symbol is already displayed as a temporary stop symbol, a probability variation symbol different from the probability variation symbol currently displayed temporarily is determined. Also good. Further, when the probability variation symbol is already temporarily displayed as a temporary stop symbol, the operation by the operation button 120 may be invalidated (for example, the processing of steps S1849 to S1856 is not executed). In this case, after the probability variation symbol is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop symbol, for example, the probability variation symbol is temporarily stopped until the effect symbol stop designation command is received or the variation time ends (specifically, a slight variation is displayed. The state in which the fluctuation is changed) is continued, and when the effect symbol stop designation command is received or when the variation time ends, the probability variation symbol may be confirmed and displayed.

  If the probability variation big hit flag is not set in step S1850 (that is, if it is a normal big hit), or if the value of the operation number counter has not reached the number of notification conditions in step S1852 (that is, the probability variation big hit). However, when the number of operations of the operation button 120 by the player has not yet reached the number of notification conditions), the effect control CPU 101 further switches and displays it according to the temporary stop symbol currently displayed temporarily. The temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) during the probability variation promotion effect for determining the temporary stop symbol (non-probability variation symbol) is selected (step S1857).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR9-4 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the probable change promotion effect, for example, from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S1858). . Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR9-4, the effect control CPU 101 uses the probability change promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) selected in step S1857, and the probability change promotion. A temporary stop symbol (non-probability variable symbol) of the effect symbol to be switched and temporarily stopped during execution of the effect is determined (step S1859). Then, the process proceeds to step S1860).

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) during a probability change promotion effect. Among these, FIG. 74 (A) is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during non-probable change promotion (non-probability change notification) that is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed for temporary stop is “222”. FIG. 74B is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during non-probable change promotion (selected for non-probability change notification), which is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “444”. FIG. 74C is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during non-probable change promotion (non-probability change notification) selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “666”. FIG. 74 (D) is a table for determining a temporary stop symbol during non-probable change promotion that is selected when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “888”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, in step S1859, the same non-probability variable symbol as the non-probability variable symbol currently displayed in temporary stop is determined as the temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed with the highest probability. In addition, each non-probable variable symbol other than the non-probable variable symbol that is currently temporarily stopped is determined with substantially the same probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “222”, the non-probability variable symbol “222” is determined with the highest probability, and the other non-probability variable is determined. The symbols (“444”, “666”, or “888”) are determined with approximately the same probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “444”, the non-probable variable symbol “444” is determined with the highest probability. Non-probable symbols (“222”, “666”, or “888”) are determined with approximately the same probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “666”, the non-probable variable symbol “666” is determined with the highest probability. A non-probable variation (“222”, “444” or “888”) is determined with approximately the same probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 74D, when the temporary stop symbol currently displayed as temporary stop is “888”, the non-probability variable symbol “888” is determined with the highest probability, A non-probable variation (“222”, “444” or “666”) is determined with approximately the same probability.

  Note that a decision value is not assigned to a non-probable variable symbol currently displayed in a temporary stop, and a probabilistic promotion is performed to determine any non-probable variable symbol other than the non-probable variable symbol currently displayed in a temporary stop. A temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) during production may be set. That is, when the operation button 120 is operated during the probable promotion effect, the temporary stop symbol may be switched from the currently displayed symbol to another symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a common big hit and a temporary stop during a common positive change promotion effect between a case where a big hit is certain and a case where the number of operations by the operation button 120 has not yet reached the number of notification conditions although it is a probable big hit. The symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) is selected (see steps S1857 and FIG. 74), and the non-probable change symbol is determined as the next temporary stop symbol in accordance with today's processing (see steps S1857 to S1859). Accordingly, the storage area of the RAM for storing the temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) during the probability change promotion effect can be saved, and the processing load of the effect control means can be reduced by making the processing common. .

  In step S1860, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process data for the effect during symbol switching (display) corresponding to the effect during the symbol change executed until the temporary stop symbol that is currently temporarily stopped is displayed by switching to the next temporary stop symbol. Control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) are switched (step S1860). That is, an effect for switching from the currently displayed temporary stop symbol on the effect display device 9 to the next temporary stop symbol determined in steps S1856 and S1859 (the interval until the next temporary stop symbol is temporarily displayed). In order to shift to the process data for effects during symbol switching. Then, based on the process data for the effect during symbol switching switched in step S1860, the effect during symbol switching is executed in step S1866 described later. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets an operation invalid flag (step S1861), and a predetermined value (for example, 0.8 seconds) in a symbol switching effect measurement timer for measuring the effect execution period of the symbol switching effect. Is set (step S1862). In this embodiment, as will be described later, an effect of moving the movable member 90 is performed during the symbol switching effect. For this reason, a time that is the same as or longer than the time until the movable member 90 reaches the maximum movable position and returns to the initial position is set as an effect execution period of the effect during symbol switching.

  Note that, by setting the operation invalidation flag in step S1861, the operation by the operation button 120 is invalidated during the period in which the symbol switching effect is being executed during the period in which the probability change promotion effect is being executed. . Specifically, if the operation invalidation flag is set, the determination processing in step S1846 does not proceed to the processing after step S1847, the operation number counter is not updated, and the temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next is displayed. Not determined.

  If the probability variation promotion effect end period has elapsed in step S1847, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation promotion effect flag and sets the probability variation promotion completed flag (step S1863).

  In step S1864, effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the effect measurement timer during symbol switching. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the effect measurement timer during symbol switching after subtraction has timed out (step S1865). If the effect measurement timer during symbol change after subtraction has not timed out, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speakers 27L, 27R) according to the contents of the effect process data n during symbol change. Control is executed (step S1866), and movable member control for moving the movable member 90 is executed (step S1867). That is, the symbol switching effect that is executed until the temporary stop symbol is switched to the temporary stop symbol determined in steps S1856 and S1859 is executed based on the symbol switching effect process table switched in step S1844. In this case, for example, a movable member 90 simulating the shape of a cherry tree branch is moved in such a manner that it overlaps the front side of the effect display device 9, and a display in which cherry blossom petals dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. By being performed, an effect during symbol switching is executed. Then, control goes to a step S1840.

  If the effect measurement timer during symbol switching has not timed out (N in step S1865), the effect control CPU 101 performs process data for temporary stop symbol display corresponding to the temporary stop symbol determined in steps S1856 and S1859 (effect during symbol switching). After the process is completed, the process is switched to the process data for displaying the temporary stop symbol determined in steps S1856 and S1859 (step S1868), and the operation invalidation flag is reset (step S1869). Thereafter, when the operation invalidation flag is reset, it is determined as N in step S1846, and in step S1848, the next temporary stop symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (slight fluctuation fluctuation display). For example, when the process of step S1848 is executed through the effect during symbol switching after the non-probable variable symbol is determined as the temporary stop symbol in step S1859, it is switched to the non-probable variable symbol as the next temporary stop symbol (before switching). (There may be the same design as) and a temporary stop display effect is performed. Further, for example, when the process of step S1848 is executed after the symbol change effect is determined after the probable change symbol is determined as the temporary stop symbol in step S1856, the next temporary stop symbol is switched to the probable change symbol and the temporary stop display is performed. By doing so, an effect of notifying that it is a probable big hit (when the player sees it, an effect that the kite was promoted to a probable big hit) is executed. Note that the temporary stop symbol display process data switched in step S1868 is prepared in advance with different data for each temporary stop symbol. In addition, temporary stop symbol display process data having different effects is prepared in advance when the probability variation symbol is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop symbol and when the non-probability variation symbol is temporarily stopped. For example, when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed in a temporary stop, only the effect of temporarily stopping the non-probable variable symbol as a temporary stop symbol is performed in the process of step S1848 executed thereafter. On the other hand, for example, when the probability variation symbol is displayed as a temporary stop, the probability variation symbol is displayed as a temporary stop symbol and characters such as “Congratulations on the probability variation promotion!” In the processing of step S1848 executed thereafter. A column is displayed to inform you that you have been promoted to a probable big hit.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing movable member control. In the movable member control, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the movable member 90 is operating (moving member is operating) (whether or not the moving member operating flag is set) (step S1221). If it is not in operation, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the movable member operated flag indicating that the movable member 77 has already been moved is set (step S1222). If the movable member operated flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 drives the movable portion drive motor 90A and starts moving the movable member 90 (step S1223). In this case, for example, control is performed to move the movable member 90 simulating the shape of a cherry tree branch from the right side of the effect display device 9 so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9. In addition, a movable member operating flag indicating that the movable member is operating is set (step S1224).

  When the movable member is operating (Y in step S1221), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an ON signal from the movable position sensor 90B is detected (step S1225). When the ON signal from the movable position sensor 90B is detected (that is, when the movable member 90 reaches the maximum movable position), the effect control CPU 101 stops driving the movable portion drive motor 90A and is movable. The movement of the member 90 is stopped (step S1226). Further, the movable member operating flag is reset (step S1227), and the movable member operated flag is set (step S1228). Then, a movable member initial position setting request flag for requesting that the movable member 90 be returned to the initial position is set (step S1229).

  In this embodiment, when the movable member 90 reaches the maximum movable position and stops moving in step S1226, the movable member initial position setting request flag is set in step S1229. In the initial position control process in step S707, a process for immediately returning the movable member 90 to the initial position is executed.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the movable member initial position control process in step S707. In the movable member initial position control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the movable member initial position setting flag is set (step S2241). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2247. If not set, it is checked whether or not the movable member initial position setting request flag is set (step S2242). If it is set, the movable member initial position setting request flag is reset (step S2243), and the movable portion drive motor 90A is driven to start driving the movable member 90 (step S2245). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 drives the movable part drive motor 90A in the direction opposite to the movable member control (see step S1223) shown in FIG. Move it in the direction to return to). Further, the moving member initial position setting flag is set (step S2246).

  When the initial position sensor 90C is turned on (a detection signal is output from the initial position sensor 90C), the drive of the movable portion drive motor 90A is stopped in order to stop the movement of the movable member 90 (steps S2247 and S2248). . Further, the movable member initial position setting flag is reset (step S2249).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S871). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, as described later, when a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S878. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S871 is a stage in which the fanfare effect is not yet executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and therefore the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S872 Without moving to step S877.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S872). Then, when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in step S872 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed: N in step S873), the presentation control CPU 101 receives a predetermined flag (for example, presentation symbol stop designation reception). (Flag) is reset (step S874), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S875). In step S874, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the previous operation failure flag is not reset.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed in step S872 (Y in step S873), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and confirms whether the fanfare flag is set. (Step S877). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S877), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878), and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S879). Then, the process timer is started (step S880). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S881).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening open display command has been received is set (step S901). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the apparatus 9, the speakers 27L and 27R, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control CPU 101 produces the round presentation (the round display corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command. An effect to be executed is selected (step S907). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S911).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S1901). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command after opening the big prize opening is received is set. (Step S1902).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S1902), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1903), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the apparatus 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1904). For example, the effect display device 9 displays the jackpot display symbol, and the effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1905), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1906). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1907).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S1902 (Y in step S1902), the effect control CPU 101 uses the interval effect (the interval corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the content of the display command after opening the big prize opening. A display effect) is selected (step S1908). Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S1909), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval production (step S1910). Then, the process timer is started (step S1911), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S1912).

  When the ending flag is set in step S1901 (Y in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the ending flag (step S1913).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set (step S1914). If the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S1915). If the probability variation big hit flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability variation promotion notified flag is set (step S1916).

  If the probability change promotion notified flag is not set (N in step S1916), the effect control CPU 101 selects an ending effect including a probability change notification effect for notifying that it is a probability change big hit (step S1917). In other words, the fact that the probability change promotion informed flag is not set in step S1916 means that although the probability change promotion effect has been executed at the time of probability change big hit, the player has failed to operate the operation button 120, and it is still a probability change big hit. This is a case where notification is not made. In this case, control is performed so as to execute an effect informing that it is a probable big hit in the ending effect (an effect as if the player was promoted to probable big hit when viewed from the player).

  In addition, when the probability change promotion effect execution flag is not set in step S1914, when the probability change big hit flag is not set in step S1915, or when the probability change promotion notification completed flag is set in step S1916, the effect The control CPU 101 selects a normal ending effect (an ending effect that does not include the probability change notification effect and notifies only the end of the big hit) (step S1918).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the ending effect selected in steps S1917 and S1918 (step S1919). In addition, the production control CPU 101 starts the production period measurement timer and starts the process timer (step S1920). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S1921).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening open display command has been received is set (step S1971). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set (N in step S1971), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1972), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the apparatus 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1973). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1974), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1975). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1976).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1971), the effect control CPU 101 selects an in-round production based on the number of rounds indicated in the big prize opening open command (step S1977). . The effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect during the round (step S1978) and starts a process timer (step S1979). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1980).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the effect period measurement timer by 1 (step S971) and confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , The speaker 27L, 27R, etc.) is controlled (step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed. If an ending effect including a probability change notification effect is selected during the round process (see step S1917), in step S974, a character string such as “probable change promotion!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9 to increase the probability change big hit. An effect of informing that this is the case (the effect that the player is promoted to a probable big hit when viewed from the player) is executed.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the effect period measurement timer times out (Y in step S972), it is confirmed whether or not the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set (step S978). If the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S979). If the probability variation big hit flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability variation promotion notified flag is set (step S980).

  If the probable change promotion informed flag is not set (N in step S980), the effect control CPU 101 sets the previous operation failure flag (step 981). In other words, the fact that the probability change promotion informed flag is not set in step S980 means that the probability change promotion effect was executed at the time of probability change big hit, but the player failed to operate the operation button 120, and the probability change big hit during the probability change promotion effect. Since it is a case where it is not notified that it is, the previous operation failure flag is set. In this embodiment, the previous operation failure flag indicates that the operation of the operation button 120 has failed in the probability variation promotion effect performed during the variation display of the effect symbol, and the notification of promotion to the probability variation big hit has not been performed. In this embodiment, in the case of a probable big hit, if the operation fails in the probable promotion effect and the probable big hit is not notified, it is informed that the probable big hit will be promoted in the subsequent ending effect. The Note that the timing for notifying the probable jackpot after the operation has failed and the probable jackpot is not reported during the probable promotion effect is not limited to the ending effect, for example, during the jackpot game after the change display of the effect symbol (for example, round In the middle production), an effect of informing that the player is promoted to a probable big hit may be executed. Further, for example, if the operation fails and the probability variation jackpot is not notified during the probability variation promotion effect, the probability variation after the end of the jackpot game may not be notified as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability change promotion informed flag is set (Y in step S980), the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 during the probability change promotion effect at the time of probability change big hit, and is a probability change big hit during the probability change promotion effect. This is a case where this is notified. In this case, if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the previous operation failure flag is reset (step S982).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets predetermined flags excluding the previous operation failure flag (for example, a probability change promotion effect execution flag, a probability change big hit flag, a probability change promotion notification flag) (step S983), and an effect control process flag Is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S984).

  Next, a specific example of the effect operation by displaying various effect images centering on the variable display of effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 will be described. In the effect control board 80, in response to receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 31, the effect display is performed based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas provided in the display area of the device 9, the variation of the effect symbols is started.

  First, a specific example in the case where the variable display result is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

  FIG. 82 shows that when the specific effect is not executed among the cases in which the display pattern variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the “slip” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 82 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 82 is specified when the “slip” specific effect as shown in FIGS. 82E1 to 82E is executed, and when the non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is specified, FIG. 82D1 to FIG. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “expansion chance” as shown in FIGS. 82 (F1) to (F6) This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 82 (A), for example, in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the variable symbol display, for example, the change in the effect symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 82B, the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” effect symbol display area.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, “6” is set as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. In response to the determination of the effect symbol indicating the number “”, the effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 82 (B) is performed. If the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1 and the "slip" specific effect is executed in the "right" effect symbol display area to cause the effect symbol to rapidly change again, the "left" effect symbol is executed. The effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the display area is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when a specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed, the combination of effect symbols constituting the development chance eyes HC6 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. In response to the determination as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, the stop display of the effect symbols as shown in FIG. 82 (B) is performed. When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, and the diagram 30 (A) based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 3) is referred to, and the combination of effect symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is determined as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. In response to this, the stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. 82 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 82 (C1), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (C2), after the effect symbol indicating “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area (temporary stop display), the final effect becomes a non-reach combination. The symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final effect symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B is referred to for the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area and the “medium” effect symbol display area. By referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 24, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are determined.

  On the other hand, when a specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed, as an example, an effect indicating a number “7” in the “right” effect symbol display area as shown in FIG. 82 (D1). After the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” effect symbol display area as shown in FIG. 82 (D2). As a result, the effect symbol which becomes the quasi-continuous chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, after temporary stop display such as display of fluctuation of the effect symbols is performed, the effect symbols may be changed again in all effect symbol display areas as shown in FIG. 82 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (D4) to (D6), effect symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the finalized design that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 82 (E1), the effect symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area (temporary). After the stop display), as shown in FIG. 82 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” effect symbol display area. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area. Here, as shown in FIG. 82 (E1), the effect symbol temporarily displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area is based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2, as shown in FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (E4), after the effect symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” effect symbol display area, the final effect becomes a non-reach combination. The symbol is stopped (final stop).

  When a specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (F1), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. After the display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 82 (F2), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” effect symbol display area. Thereby, the effect symbols constituting the development chance HC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (F3), an effect display in which the temporarily stopped effect design rotates in a certain direction is performed, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 82 (F4), An effect display is performed so that the player can expect that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the effect symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 82 (F4) rotates in the direction of reversal, the development to reach the reach state occurs. In this example, the development that reaches the reach state does not occur, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (F5), after the effect display that the temporary stop display effect symbol in the rotation state returns to the original is performed. The finalized design symbols constituting the development chance HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 83 shows an example of the display operation when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 83 is executed. In FIG. 83 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol display, the variation of the effect symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the effect symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the “right” effect symbol display area is displayed. The effect symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the “medium” effect symbol display area. The character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 83C, for example, after the effect display that updates the effect symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas is performed, As shown in 83 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” effect symbol display area, the update display to the effect symbol indicating the number “4” is changed to the “right” effect symbol display area. Then, the update display to the effect design which shows the number "3" is performed, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), after the effect display that further updates the effect symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas is performed, for example, FIG. As shown in (F), with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” effect symbol display area, an update display to the effect symbol indicating “2” is displayed, while in the “right” effect symbol display area. Update display to the effect design indicating the number “1” is performed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), an effect display that updates the effect symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas as the character image CH1 changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (H) to 83 (K), in the “left” effect symbol display area, the effect symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the effect symbol display area “”, the effect symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” effect symbol display area, for example, an effect display for updating the effect symbol is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (L), and then “3” is displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (M). An effect design indicating a number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “Intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the definite effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 84 shows an example of the display operation when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one of them is designated, the “intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 84 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 84, the same effect display as in FIGS. 83 (A) to (L) is performed in the portions of FIGS. Thereafter, in the “right” effect symbol display area, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (M), the effect symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area. The variable display state becomes the reach state along with the effect symbols displayed temporarily. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a reach combination, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  85 to 87 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 85 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol variable display, the variation of the effect symbol is displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the effect symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” effect symbol display area.

  And, for example, when a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIG. 85 (C1) to (C3), After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas, the effect symbol is changed again in the “right” effect symbol display area and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state becomes the reach state. Further, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4, for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (D1) to (D5), After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas, the effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the effect symbol display areas. Thereafter, in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas, the effect symbols indicating the number “6” are all displayed in a stop display (temporary stop display), so that the variable display state of the effect symbols becomes the reach state. Become. Further, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 85 (E1) to (E6). In all the effect symbol display areas, after the effect symbol combination that becomes the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the effect display that the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped is rotated in the reverse direction. Is performed, the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIGS. 85 (C3) and 85 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” effect symbol display area is increased. descend. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, a number indicating “6” in the “medium” effect symbol display area as shown in FIG. 86 (B). A “normal” reach effect is displayed in which stop display (temporary stop display) is performed together with the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (B), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), after displaying the effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area whose “medium” is “medium”, Reach loss by, for example, stopping and displaying the effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” effect symbol display area, such as stopping the effect symbol number “5” in the effect symbol display area. What is necessary is just to stop and display the fixed effect symbol which comprises a combination, and complete | finish the variable display of an effect symbol. When any one of reach production α1 to reach production α3 or reach production β1 to reach production β3 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuation speed of the production symbol rises again, and various reach production displays are started. For example, in the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 86 (D) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. In the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 86 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 86 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (G), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbol constituting the big hit combination is stopped and displayed, but the variable display result becomes “lost”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed effect symbols constituting the reach-losing combination and to end the variable display of the effect symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, in reach effect β2 and reach effect β3, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 86 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 86 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporarily stopped). An effect symbol to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the displayed effect symbols are not changed, and the confirmed effect symbols constituting the reach lose combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to complete the variable display of the effect symbol. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 87B to 87D, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the temporarily stopped display effect symbol is displayed as a final stop symbol as it is as a finalized stop symbol (final stop display).

  FIG. 88 shows an example of a display operation when the notice display effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), for example, corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, each effect symbol of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed. The effect symbols that have been stopped in the display area start changing in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as shown in FIG. 88 (B). Thereafter, for example, according to the effect display control data read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided corresponding to the decided notice pattern of the notice YP3-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (C). As described above, the effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is displayed. When the player operates the operation button 120 within a predetermined period and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120 to the effect control board 80 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 101 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 showing the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 120 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is erased as shown in FIG. 88 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the effect symbols are variably displayed such that the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area.

  FIG. 89 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 89 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, there is a variation in the production symbol in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Be started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to 89 (D), effect symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as the big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), an effect image for notifying the shift to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. Then, as an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 89 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 89, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next effect design starts to change. Even when the variable display result is “small hit”, the effect is executed in accordance with the display mode similar to the effect at the time of “probable” shown in FIG. Further, for example, the display is not limited to the case of the sudden change sudden change big hit or small hit change display. For example, when the next change display is performed when the promotion to the probability change is not notified in the probability change promotion effect, FIG. You may make it perform the effect of a LIVE mode in the aspect shown to (E)-(G).

  Next, an effect aspect of the probability change promotion effect executed in the effect display device 9 will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the probability variation promotion effect executed in the effect display device. In the example shown in FIG. 90, it is assumed that the probability variation big hit is determined, and it is determined that the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the probability variation promotion effect setting process (see steps S2503 to S2506). In the probability variation promotion effect setting process, it is assumed that “666” is determined as a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop immediately before the start of the probability variation promotion effect (see steps S2507 and S2508). In the probability variation promotion effect setting process, it is assumed that the number of notification conditions is determined to be 3 (see steps S2511 to S2515).

  If it is decided to execute the probability change promotion effect, for example, the effect symbol change display is executed based on the process data for change display, and immediately before the probability change promotion effect start time, in the probability change promotion effect setting process An effect of temporarily stopping the determined temporary stop symbol (“666” in this example) is displayed (see step S1839). Then, when the probability change promotion effect start time (for example, 10 seconds before the end of the change) elapses during the variation display of the effect symbol (see step S1838), the probability variation promotion effect is started, and the temporary stop symbol display is performed from the process data for variation display After switching to the process data (see step S1844), as shown in FIG. 90 (A), based on the temporary stop symbol display process data, the temporary stop state of the temporary stop symbol 91A (in this example, “666”) ( Specifically, while the slight fluctuation state is continued, a character string 92 such as “Press the button!” Is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848). ).

  When the player operates the operation button 120, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the number of operations of the operation button 120 is three or more, which is the notification condition number (see step S1852), and the notification condition. Since the number has not yet reached (the number of operations is still one), an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next (see step S1857). In the example shown in FIG. 90, it is assumed that “666” is determined again as the next temporary stop symbol. Then, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched to the symbol switching effect process data (see step S1860), and as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the cherry tree branch is displayed based on the symbol switching effect process data. The movable member 90 that imitates the shape of the effect display device 9 is moved so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9, and the effect during symbol switching is executed such that the cherry blossom petals 93 dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9. (See steps S1866 and S1867).

  Next, when the symbol switching effect is finished, the symbol switching effect process data is switched to the temporary stop symbol display process data (see step S1868), and as shown in FIG. 90C, the temporary stop symbol display is performed. Based on the process data, the next temporary stop symbol 91B (“666” in this example) is switched to a temporary stop display (specifically, a slight fluctuation change display) and characters such as “Press the button!” The column 92 is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848).

  Furthermore, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 is operated three times or more as the notification condition number (see step S1852). Since the number of notification conditions has not yet been reached (the number of operations is still 2), an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next (see step S1857). In the example shown in FIG. 90, it is assumed that “222” is determined as the next temporary stop symbol. Then, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched to the symbol switching effect process data (see step S1860), and, as shown in FIG. The movable member 90 simulating the shape is moved so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9, and the effect during symbol switching is executed such that the cherry blossom petals 93 dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9 ( Steps S1866 and S1867).

  Next, when the symbol switching effect is finished, the symbol switching effect process data is switched to the temporary stop symbol display process data (see step S1868), and as shown in FIG. Based on the process data, the next temporary stop symbol 91C (in this example, “222”) is switched to a temporary stop display (specifically, a slight fluctuation change display) and characters such as “Press the button!” The column 92 is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848).

  Furthermore, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 is operated three times or more as the notification condition number (see step S1852). In this case, since the number of operations of the operation button 120 has reached the number of notification conditions, the probability variation symbol is determined as the temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next (see step S1856). In the example shown in FIG. 90, it is assumed that “777” is determined as the next temporary stop symbol. Then, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched to the symbol switching effect process data (see step S1860), and as shown in FIG. 90F, the cherry branch The movable member 90 simulating the shape is moved so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9, and the effect during symbol switching is executed such that the cherry blossom petals 93 dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9 ( Steps S1866 and S1867).

  Next, when the symbol switching effect is finished, the symbol switching effect process data is switched to the temporary stop symbol display process data (see step S1868), and as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the temporary stop symbol display Based on the process data, the next temporary stop symbol is switched to the probable variable symbol 91D (in this example, “777”) and temporarily stopped (specifically, a slight fluctuation variation display) is performed. It is notified that there is. That is, from the viewpoint of the player, an effect as if the player has been promoted from the normal big hit to the probable big hit by performing the operation of the operation button 120 is performed. Note that process data for temporary stop symbol display with different effects is prepared in advance for the case of temporarily stopping the probability variation symbol as a temporary stop symbol and the case of temporarily stopping the non-probability symbol as a temporary stop symbol. When displaying the temporary stop, as shown in FIG. 90G, based on the temporary stop symbol display process data, the probability variation symbol (“777” in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol. "Congratulations on the probable change promotion!"

  When the probable change symbol is displayed as a temporary stop symbol, if the effect execution period of the probable change promotion effect has not ended yet, a character string such as “Press the button!” Along with the probable change symbol as the temporary stop symbol. Is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848). In this case, if the player further operates the operation button 120, the same probability variation symbol is repeatedly determined as the next temporary stop symbol (see step S1856), and the symbol switching effect and the temporary stop symbol (same probability variation symbol) are determined. The effect of performing the switching display is repeatedly executed. If the probability variation symbol has already been displayed as a temporary stop symbol, the operation of the operation button 120 is invalidated, and the temporary stop symbol (probability variation symbol) is switched until the production symbol stop designation command is received or the variation time ends. May not be performed. Then, based on the reception of the effect symbol stop designation command or the end of the variation time, the probability variation symbol during the temporary stop display may be fixedly displayed.

  When the end time of the probable change promotion effect (for example, 1.0 seconds before the end of change) has elapsed (see step S1847), the probable change promotion effect is ended (see step S1863), and an effect symbol stop designation command is received or the change time timer times out Until this is done (see steps S1831, S1832), the effect of displaying the last temporary stop symbol 91D as shown in FIG. 90 (G) with slight fluctuation fluctuation based on the temporary stop symbol display process data is continued. Then, when the design stop designation command is received or when the variable time timer times out (see steps S1831, S1832), as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the temporary display design 91D (in this example, the probable change is displayed). The symbol “777”) is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (see step S872).

  Next, the switching timing of the effect in the case where the probability variation promotion effect is executed and the case where it is not executed in the variation display of the effect symbol will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the switching timing of the effect in the case where the probability variation promotion effect is executed and the case where it is not executed in the variation display of the effect symbol. Among these, FIG. 91 (A) shows the switching timing of the effect in the case of executing the probable change promotion effect in the change display of the effect symbol. Moreover, FIG. 91 (B) shows the switching timing of the effect when the probability variation promotion effect is not executed in the change display of the effect symbol.

  First, an effect switching timing in the case of executing a probable promotion effect in the effect symbol variation display will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (A), it is determined that the probability variation jackpot, and the production control microcomputer 100 receives the super reach variation pattern command (see FIG. 8) from the game control microcomputer 560. To do. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect during the effect symbol change display based on the reception of the change pattern command for super reach (see step S2502). . In the example shown in FIG. 91A, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect in the probability variation promotion effect setting process (see steps S2503 to S2506). In the probability variation promotion effect setting process, it is assumed that the number of notification conditions is determined to be 3 (see steps S2511 to S2515). Then, the variation display process table for executing the certain variation promotion effect is selected according to the setting contents in the certain variation promotion effect setting process (see step S839), and the variation display of the effect symbol is started according to the variation display process table. In this case, a process table having a shorter reach effect period (shorter than the reach B period shown in FIG. 91B) is selected as the variable display process table as compared with the case where the probability change promotion effect is not executed. The

  Next, at the start timing of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 91A, the process shifts to the reach A effect according to the variation display process table. Immediately before the probable change promotion effect start time is reached, an effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the temporary stop symbol determined in the probable change promotion effect setting process is performed (see step S1839). When the probability change promotion effect start time (for example, 10 seconds before the end of the change) has elapsed (see step S1838), the probability change promotion effect is started, and the process data for change display is switched to the process data for temporary stop symbol display ( Step S1844), as shown in FIG. 91A, based on the temporary stop symbol display process data, the temporary stop state of the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol display A shown in FIG. 91A) (specifically Is continued, and a character string such as “Press the button!” Is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848).

  When the player operates the operation button 120, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the number of operations of the operation button 120 is three or more, which is the notification condition number (see step S1852), and the notification condition. Since the number has not yet reached (the number of operations is still one), an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next (see step S1857). Then, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched to the symbol switching effect process data (see step S1860), and as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the movable member 90 is moved and the symbol switching effect is displayed. Based on the process data, the movable member 90 simulating the shape of a cherry tree branch is moved so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9, and the pattern in which the cherry blossom petals dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9 An effect during switching is executed (see steps S1866 and S1867).

  Next, when the symbol switching effect is finished, the symbol switching effect process data is switched to the temporary stop symbol display process data (see step S1868), and as shown in FIG. 91A, the temporary stop symbol display is performed. Based on the process data, the next temporary stop symbol is switched to a temporary stop display (temporary stop display B shown in FIG. 91A) (specifically, a slight fluctuation change display is made) and “Press the button! "Is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848).

  Furthermore, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 is operated three times or more as the notification condition number (see step S1852). Since the number of notification conditions has not yet been reached (the number of operations is still 2), an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next (see step S1857). Then, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched to the symbol switching effect process data (see step S1860), and as shown in FIG. 91A, the movable member 90 is moved and the symbol switching effect process is performed. Based on the data, the movable member 90 simulating the shape of a cherry tree branch is moved so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9, and the design is switched so that the cherry blossom petals dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The medium effect is executed (see steps S1866 and S1867).

  Next, when the symbol switching effect is finished, the symbol switching effect process data is switched to the temporary stop symbol display process data (see step S1868), and as shown in FIG. 91A, the temporary stop symbol display is performed. Based on the process data, the next temporary stop symbol is switched to the temporary stop display (temporary stop display C shown in FIG. 91 (A)) (specifically, the slight fluctuation variation is displayed) and “Press the button! "Is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 is executed (see step S1848).

  Furthermore, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 is operated three times or more as the notification condition number (see step S1852). In this case, since the number of operations of the operation button 120 has reached the number of notification conditions, the probability variation symbol is determined as the temporary stop symbol to be switched and displayed next (see step S1856). Then, the temporary stop symbol display process data is switched to the symbol switching effect process data (see step S1860), and as shown in FIG. 91A, the movable member 90 is moved and the symbol switching effect process is performed. Based on the data, the movable member 90 simulating the shape of a cherry tree branch is moved so as to overlap the front side of the effect display device 9, and the design is switched so that the cherry blossom petals dance on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The medium effect is executed (see steps S1866 and S1867).

  Next, when the symbol switching effect is finished, the symbol switching effect process data is switched to the temporary stop symbol display process data (see step S1868), and as shown in FIG. 91A, the temporary stop symbol display is performed. Based on the process data, the next temporary stop symbol is switched to the probability variation symbol and the temporary stop display (temporary stop display D shown in FIG. 91A) is performed (specifically, the slight fluctuation fluctuation display is performed). , It is notified that it is a probable big hit. That is, when viewed from the player, the operation is performed as if the player was promoted from the normal big hit to the probable big hit by successfully operating the operation button 120.

  When the end time of the probable change promotion effect (for example, 1.0 seconds before the end of change) has elapsed (see step S1847), the probable change promotion effect is ended (see step S1863), and an effect symbol stop designation command is received or the change time timer times out Until this is done (see steps S1831, S1832), based on the temporary stop symbol display process data, as shown in FIG. 91A, the effect of displaying the last temporary stop symbol in a slightly fluctuating manner is continued. Then, when the production symbol stop designation command is received or the variable time timer times out (see steps S1831, S1832), as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the temporary stop symbol displayed last (in this example, the probability variation symbol). ) As a final stop symbol (see step S872).

  Next, an effect switching timing in the case where the probability variation promotion effect is not executed in the effect symbol variation display will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (B), it is determined that the probability variation jackpot, and the production control microcomputer 100 receives the super reach variation pattern command (see FIG. 8) from the game control microcomputer 560. To do. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 receives the same variation pattern command as that shown in the example of FIG.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect during the effect symbol change display based on the reception of the change pattern command for super reach (see step S2502). In the example shown in FIG. 91 (B), it is assumed that it is determined that the probability variation promotion effect is not executed in the probability variation promotion effect setting process (steps S2503 to S2505). Then, according to the setting contents in the probability variation promotion effect setting process, the variation display process table corresponding to the case where the probability variation promotion effect is not executed is selected (see step S839), and the variation display of the effect symbol is started according to the variation display process table. Is done. In this case, a process table having a longer reach effect period (longer than the reach B period shown in FIG. 91B) is selected as the variable display process table as compared with the case of executing the probability change promotion effect. The

  Next, at the start timing of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the process proceeds to the reach A effect according to the process table for variable display as in the case of executing the probability variation promotion effect shown in FIG. 91 (A). To do. Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the case where the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, when the probability variation promotion effect start time arrives, the reach effect B is developed from the reach A according to the process data for variable display. Production is performed. For example, from the reach A in which the left and right are stopped at the same symbol and the variation in the middle symbol is continued, the reach B effect is developed in such a manner that a predetermined character appears. When the effect symbol stop designation command is received or the variable time timer times out (see steps S1831, S1832), the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (B) (see step S872).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a probability variation big hit, and a predetermined notification condition is established based on an operation by the operation button 120 during execution of the probability variation promotion effect. When this happens, the probability variation big hit is notified by switching to the probability variation symbol as a temporary stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute such an effect that the player is promoted to a probable big hit by the player's operation.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a probable big hit, and when the operation button 120 is operated during execution of the probable change promotion effect, but the predetermined notification condition is not satisfied, Switch to a non-probable variable symbol as a temporary stop symbol. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 is used for determining the temporary stop symbol during the probable change promotion effect, which is normally used when the jackpot is determined in order to select the non-probable variable symbol from among the plurality of symbols as the temporary stop symbol. A table common to the table (for non-probability change notification) is set. Then, a non-probable variation symbol is selected as a temporary stop symbol using the common probability variation promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability variation notification) that has been set. Therefore, the necessary storage area for storing the temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change notification) during the probability change promotion effect can be reduced, and an increase in processing load in the probability change promotion effect can be minimized.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation promotion effect is shown to be executed at the end of the variation of the production symbol (in this embodiment, from 10 seconds before the variation end to 1.0 second before the variation). The timing for executing the promotion effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may perform the probable promotion effect according to the same manner as the production mode shown in FIG. 90 during the big hit game (for example, during the round production or interval production) or during the ending production. You may control to perform.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the effect control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect is shown, but the game control microcomputer 100 side may determine the execution. Good. For example, when the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be performed during a jackpot game or during the execution of an ending effect, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a probability variation jackpot with a probability variation promotion effect as a jackpot type in the special symbol normal processing. A normal jackpot and a probability jackpot or normal jackpot that does not involve a probable promotion effect are determined (see steps S1515 to S1517), and a display result command that can specify whether or not the probable promotion effect is executed is transmitted (see step S1522). You may do it. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the execution of the probability variation promotion effect is designated based on the received display result command. The temporary stop symbol and the number of notification conditions before starting the promotion effect may be determined (see steps S2507, S2508, S2511 to S2515), and the probability change promotion effect may be executed during the big hit game or during the execution of the ending effect. Further, for example, when the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be performed during the variation display of the effect symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit with the probability variation promotion effect in the special symbol normal processing, The variation pattern including the probability variation promotion effect may be determined in the variation pattern setting process, and the variation pattern command may be transmitted (see steps S333 and S336). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform control so as to execute the probability variation promotion effect based on the received variation pattern command.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of notification conditions, which is the number of operations of the operating means, as the predetermined notification condition. Then, when the probability variation big hit is determined and the number of times the operation button 120 is operated during execution of the probability variation promotion effect reaches the notification condition number, the temporary variation symbol is switched to the probability variation symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute such an effect that the player is promoted to a probable big hit according to the number of operations using the operation buttons 120 of the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control so as to invalidate the operation by the operation button 120 when the symbol switching production during the probability variation promotion production is being executed. Therefore, during the execution of the symbol switching effect, the operation by the operation button 120 is not accepted, and the symbol switching effect is performed at the timing when the operation by the operation button 120 is performed during a period other than during the execution of the symbol switching effect. After the execution, it can be switched to the next temporary stop symbol. Therefore, the player can feel that the symbol switching effect is started by the operation of the operation button 120 and the temporary stop symbol is switched and displayed.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the predetermined notification condition to be changed to a condition having a different difficulty level for the operation based on the operation state of the operation button. Therefore, the probability variation promotion effect can be executed according to the player's characteristics, and the player's interest in the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot can be improved.

  For example, even a player with a low operation skill who cannot hit the operation button 120 repeatedly or press it at a predetermined timing cannot succeed in the operation with the operation button 120 every time. It is possible to prevent a situation in which (probability change frequency) cannot be satisfied and promotion to probability change is not notified. Therefore, the interest with respect to the operation by the operation button 120 can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, when the player has failed to operate the operation button 120 at the time of the previous execution of the probable change promotion effect, and it is not notified that the probable big hit is being performed during the execution of the probable change promotion effect, Although the case where the operation difficulty level by the operation button 120 is made low (see FIG. 66) is shown, the mode in which the predetermined notification condition is changed to a condition with a different operation difficulty level is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to things. For example, when the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 during the previous execution of the probability change promotion effect, and it is not notified that the probability change big hit is being performed during the execution of the probability change promotion effect, it is difficult to operate the operation button 120. The degree may be increased. In this case, for example, instead of the probability variation promotion operation count determination table (when the previous operation fails) shown in FIG. 66 (B), a larger number of determination values (for example, 8 to 10) as the notification condition count ( For example, when the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 at the time of execution of the previous probability change promotion effect using the probability change promotion operation count determination table (when the previous operation is successful) assigned 15) The number of notification conditions may be determined so that the operation difficulty level becomes high.

  For example, it is possible to increase the degree of satisfaction with the game by tightening conditions for establishing a predetermined notification condition (number of notification conditions) for a player with a high operation technique of the operation button 120. Therefore, the interest with respect to the operation by the operation button 120 can be further improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the operation difficulty level is changed based on the operation state of the operation button 120 at the time of the last probable promotion effect is shown as the operation state of the player. When performing a notice effect or a reach effect accompanying a player's operation, the operation difficulty level may be changed based on the operation state of the operation button 120 in the notice effect or the reach effect. For example, when a notice effect or a reach effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 101 determines the number of times the detection signal is input from the operation button 120 in the notice effect or the reach effect during the effect symbol change display. You may make it count using a predetermined | prescribed counter. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control may change the operation difficulty level so as to be easier if the count value of the counter is less than a predetermined number when the probability change promotion effect is executed next during the big hit game. On the contrary, if the count value of the counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the operation difficulty level may be changed to be difficult. Moreover, you may make it change an operation difficulty level based on the operation condition of the operation button 120 at the time of other probability change promotion effects performed not only the last time the probability change promotion effect, but several times before.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are provided that variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be distinguished from each other and derive and display the display results. For this reason, by allowing variable display of a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to provide more playability.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the display result on the first special symbol display 8a or displays the display result on the second special symbol display 8b. When the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 1 or more (specifically, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory in steps S1503 and S1504 of the special symbol normal process) When both the numbers are determined to be 1) and the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is displayed as the second special symbol display. This is executed in preference to the variable display of the second special symbol in the device 8b, and when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the second special symbol variable display in the second special symbol display unit 8b. Run in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 8a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the invalidation of the start winning prize.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of reserved memories when the total number of reserved memories corresponding to the sum of the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. The variable display time is shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a shortening variation is performed on one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the other In the special symbol display, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to reduce the situation in which the start winning is invalidated. Therefore, the operating rate of variable display can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect in the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 when it is determined to be out of place. Further, the technique control microcomputer 560 has a small total reserved memory number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number when the total reserved memory number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is large. It is determined that the reach effect is executed at a small rate compared to the time. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is large, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the reach effect during the variation display of the effect symbols. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the operation rate of variable display can be improved and the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. be able to. Moreover, the situation where starting winning becomes invalid can be reduced by improving the operating rate of variable display.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the identification information is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach the reach state using the reach determination random number MR2-2. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. Also, a variation pattern of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined from among the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type, using a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach state is determined or not, the variation pattern type can be determined using the common variation pattern type determination random number MR3, and the variation pattern can be determined. The data capacity (data capacity of the work area for determining the variation pattern) can be reduced. Further, according to this embodiment, after selecting the variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined by the common processing routine using the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and the variation pattern determination table is selected. After that, the variation pattern is determined by a common processing routine using the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. Therefore, by sharing the processing routine, the program for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern can be compressed, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in response to the determination that the reach state is made by the determination process using the reach determination random number MR2-2, the random value MR3 for the variation pattern type determination is determined. Is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the determination process using the reach determination random number value MR2-2, the special symbol variable display using the variation pattern type determination random number MR3 is performed. Any one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type for executing a specific effect (effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-run”, “intro”, “development opportunity”) in the effect display device 9 To decide. For this reason, even when it is determined to be out of date and it is determined not to reach the reach state, a specific effect can be executed during the variable display. Therefore, even when it is not a big hit and when it does not reach the reach mode, various effects can be executed during the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of whether or not the reach state has been determined, the variation pattern type is determined using the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, so the capacity of the program for determining the variation pattern is reduced. Can be reduced.

  For example, as a conventional gaming machine, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-160763 discloses a reach based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 by using the values of two variation type counters such as the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. There is described a gaming machine configured to determine a type and the like, and to determine a more detailed symbol variation mode based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-160763, the values of two fluctuation type counters are used to determine the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit or the occurrence of reach. If not, the symbol variation type is determined using only the first variation type counter CS1 without using the second variation type counter CS2. For this reason, the number of symbol variation types determined when neither big hit nor reach is reduced, and it is not possible to improve the game entertainment taste when neither big hit nor reach.

  In addition, since the variation pattern is determined using only one random number when it is neither big hit nor reach, the probability that each variation pattern is selected tends to be the same, and the selection ratio of each variation pattern has randomness. Without bias. Also, if the selection ratio of each variation pattern is intentionally random, the method of assigning the determination value to the random value becomes complicated, and the complexity in designing the appearance frequency of each variation pattern increases.

  In this embodiment, even if it is neither big hit nor reach, there is a case where the fluctuation pattern including a specific effect is determined using two random numbers, so the symbol fluctuation type in the case where neither big hit nor reach is increased And can improve the interest of the game. Further, after the variation pattern type is assigned using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is finally determined using the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. (That is, since the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process), the selection ratio of each variation pattern can be easily randomized, and the selection ratio of each variation pattern is not biased. be able to.

  For example, when a variation pattern is determined using only one random number, when distribution of each variation pattern is to be changed, distribution of random number values for all variation patterns must be changed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to change the distribution of random values for each variation pattern within the distributed variation pattern type, so the appearance frequency of each variation pattern can be easily changed in design.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. A common effect design stop designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of symbols is stopped. Therefore, the number of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, when the probability variation promotion is determined and the probability variation promotion effect is executed, the player fails in the operation of the operation button 120 and is notified that the probability variation bonus effect is being performed during the execution of the probability variation promotion effect. In the case where there is not, the case of notifying that the probability variation big hit is notified in the ending effect has been shown, but the control method in the case where the operation button 120 has failed to be informed and the probability variation big hit has not been reported is the first method. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, when the operation of the operation button 120 fails and it is not informed that it is a promising big hit, after finishing the big hit gaming state, an effect in which the probable state cannot be recognized (for example, a background with a green background color) May be displayed in such a manner that the display of the effect symbol is performed and the change display of the effect symbol is executed. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a second embodiment in which, when the operation of the operation button 120 fails and it is not notified that a promising big hit is made, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probable change state cannot be recognized. To do.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing (step S705) in the second embodiment. In the command analysis process, the processes in steps S1611 to S1625 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the received effect control command is a high-probability state background designation command (command 9501 (H)) (step S1625), the effect control CPU 101 performs an unspecified display as to whether or not it is in a probable variation state. It is confirmed whether or not the designated unspecified display flag is set (step S1626). As will be described later, the unspecified display flag is set based on the fact that the probability change promotion operation has failed when the probability change promotion effect is executed. If the unspecified display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a red background as the background color on the effect display device 9 (step S1627). If the unspecified display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1629.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H)) (step S1628), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a green background as the background color on the effect display device 9. Is performed (step S1629). Even when the unspecified display flag is set in step S <b> 1625, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S <b> 1629 and performs control to display a green background as a background color on the effect display device 9.

  When the process of steps S1625 to S1629 is executed and the probability variation big hit is determined and the probability variation promotion effect is executed, after the big hit is executed and the fact that the probability change has already been reported, A red background is displayed on the display device 9, and an effect such as a change display of the effect symbol is performed in a state in which it is possible to recognize that it is in a probable variation state. In addition, when a big hit is executed after a normal big hit is determined, or when a probable change promotion effect is executed after being determined to be a promising big hit, promotion to a probable change is made in the probable promotion effect even after the big hit is executed. When it is not notified that the operation has failed and the probability is changed, a green background is displayed on the effect display device 9, and an effect such as a change display of the effect symbol is performed in a state in which it is impossible to recognize whether or not the effect is changed. Is called. It should be noted that the effect in which it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is in the probability variation state is continued even during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  When a normal state background designation command is received, the background may be displayed on the effect display device 9 with a background color (for example, blue) indicating that the gaming state is the normal state. In this case, the game state is in the normal state when it is not notified that the promotion operation to the probability change has failed in the probability change promotion effect even if it is determined that the probability change jackpot is a probability change. The background may be displayed on the effect display device 9 with the same background color (for example, blue) as in the case. Even in such a case, when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot, or even if it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot, it is not reported that the promotion operation to the probability variation fails in the probability variation promotion effect and it will be a probability variation In other words, it is possible to perform effects such as a change display of effect symbols in a state where it is not possible to recognize whether or not the state is a certain change state.

  In addition, for example, when the gaming state is the time-short state, when the time-short state background designation command is transmitted, the effect display device 9 is further different when the time-short state background designation command is received. The background may be displayed on the effect display device 9 with a background color (for example, yellow). Also, instead of always displaying a red background when it is already informed that it will be probabilistic, it is shifted only to the high probability state, and it is shifted to the high probability state and also to the short time state. It is also possible to display the background of a different background color on the effect display device 9 depending on the case where it is performed. In this case, when the game ball is in a high base state where it is easy to start and win, the same background color (for example, yellow) as that in the short time state is displayed, and in a low base state where the game ball is difficult to start and win. In some cases, the same background color (for example, blue) as in the normal state may be displayed.

  Note that the processing after step S1630 in the command analysis processing is the same as those processing described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating the mid-round processing (step S805) according to the second embodiment. In the in-round processing, the processing in steps S1901 to S1913 is the same as those processing described in the first embodiment.

  When the ending flag is reset (step S1913), the CPU 101 for effect control selects process data according to a normal ending effect (an ending effect that does not include the probability change notification effect and notifies only the end of the big hit) (step S1919A). . Then, control goes to a step S1920. That is, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the probability change notification effect is not executed in the ending effect.

  Note that the processes in steps S1920 and S1921 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the second embodiment. In the big hit end effect process, the processes in steps S971 to S977 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the effect period measurement timer times out (Y in step S972), it is confirmed whether or not the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set (step S978). If the probability change promotion effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S979). If the probability variation big hit flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability variation promotion notified flag is set (step S980).

  If the probability change promotion informed flag is not set (N in step S980), the effect control CPU 101 sets the previous operation failure flag (step 981) and sets the unspecified display flag (step S981A). Then, control goes to a step S983A. In other words, the fact that the probability change promotion informed flag is not set in step S980 means that the probability change promotion effect was executed at the time of probability change big hit, but the player failed to operate the operation button 120, and the probability change big hit during the probability change promotion effect. This is a case in which it is not notified that the previous operation failure flag and the unspecified display flag are set.

  On the other hand, if the probability change promotion informed flag is set (Y in step S980), the player succeeds in operating the operation button 120 during the probability change promotion effect at the time of probability change big hit, and is a probability change big hit during the probability change promotion effect. This is a case where this is notified. In this case, if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the previous operation failure flag is reset (step S982). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the unspecified display if it is set (step S982A). Then, control goes to a step S983A. Note that if the probability variation promotion effect execution flag is not set in step S978, or if the probability variation big hit flag is not set in step S979, step S982A is executed. The display flag is reset.

  Next, in step S983A, the effect control CPU 101 resets predetermined flags excluding the previous operation failure flag and the unspecified display flag (for example, the probability change promotion effect execution flag, the probability change big hit flag, and the probability change promotion notified flag). . Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S984).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when it is not notified that the operation button 120 has not been successfully operated in the probability variation promotion effect, the jackpot gaming state is terminated. After that, an effect that cannot be recognized as being in a probable variation state is executed (for example, the background is displayed with a green background color and the effect symbol is changed). Therefore, in addition to the same effects as in the first embodiment, it is understood that the probable big hit is internally determined after the big hit gaming state regardless of the operation using the operation button 120 by the player. It is possible to prevent such a situation from being played, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to operate using the operation buttons 120 and the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the effect control is performed only on the effect control board 80 among the boards for controlling each effect device (effect display device 9, speakers 27L and 27R, lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c). Although the case where the microcomputer 100 is mounted is shown, the microcomputer may be mounted on a plurality of substrates that control each rendering device.

  For example, the gaming machine 1 includes a sound / lamp control board that controls the speakers 27L and 27R, the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c, and a symbol control board that controls the effect display device 9, and the sound / lamp control board has a sound / lamp control board. A lamp control microcomputer may be mounted, and the symbol control microcomputer may be mounted on the symbol control board. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 first transmits a change start command, a change pattern command, and a display result command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer, and the design from the sound / lamp control microcomputer. These commands may be transferred (or transmitted after processing) to the control microcomputer. Then, the symbol control microcomputer may display the variation of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 based on the command transferred (or received) from the sound / lamp control microcomputer. In addition, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 first transmits an effect symbol stop designation command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer, and the effect symbol is transferred from the sound / lamp control microcomputer to the symbol control microcomputer. The stop designation command may be transferred (or transmitted after processing). The symbol control microcomputer stops the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 based on the effect symbol stop designation command transferred (or received) from the sound / lamp control microcomputer. A stop symbol may be derived and displayed. The sound / lamp control microcomputer determines the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice effect, the stop symbol of the effect, etc., and adds the determined contents to the command and transfers them to the design control microcomputer. You may make it do. The symbol control microcomputer may execute a notice effect based on a command transferred (or received) from the sound / lamp control microcomputer, or may derive and display a stop symbol of the effect symbol.

  The game control microcomputer 560 first transmits a command such as a change start command, a change pattern command, a display result command, and an effect symbol stop designation command to the symbol control microcomputer. These commands may be transferred (or sent after processing) to the sound / lamp control microcomputer. The sound / lamp control microcomputer may control the speakers 27L and 27R and the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c based on a command transferred (or received) from the symbol control microcomputer.

  Further, for example, the gaming machine 1 may include a sound control board that controls the speakers 27L and 27R, and a lamp / design control board that controls the lamps 28a, 28b, and 28c and the effect display device 9. . Further, the gaming machine may include a sound / design control board for controlling the speakers 27L, 27R and the effect display device 9, and a lamp control board for controlling the lamps 28a, 28b, 28c.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the big hit determination process (see steps S1508 to S1517) is performed when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the second special symbol is displayed as a variable symbol. Although the case where the process is executed as a process of the common routine has been shown, in the start port switch passing process (see step S312), the start winning confirmation process for the first start winning port 13 and the start winning for the second start winning port 14 are shown. The confirmation process may be made a common routine. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process when the common routine is implemented. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the second start winning a prize opening switch 14a is on (step S211A). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the start port pointer (step S211B). If the second start port switch 14a is not turned on (that is, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on), data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S211B).

  Data indicating the address of the first reserved memory number counter or the address of the second reserved memory number counter is set in the start port pointer. That is, the data indicating “first” set in the start port pointer indicates the address of the first reserved memory number counter, and the data indicating “second” indicates the address of the second reserved memory number counter. The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. A first reserved memory number counter and a second reserved memory number counter are also formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Instead of the start port pointer, data indicating “first” or “second” may be set in a register inside the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4 (step S212A). If the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4, the process ends.

  If the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (step S213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicated by the start port pointer is set in the area (step S214A).

  Next, the CPU 56 selects each random value (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, reach determination) from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. Random number value MR2-2, random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area in the holding storage buffer indicated by the start port pointer. Processing is executed (step S215A).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start port winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer (step S216A). Further, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating the total reserved memory number based on the value of the total reserved memory number counter (step S218).

  Note that both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a may be turned on at the same timing. Therefore, when data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer in step S211B based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is in the on state in step S211A, the processing in steps S212A to S218 is executed. Later, it may be confirmed whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state. If the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, step S211C may be executed to set data indicating “first” in the start port pointer, and the processing after step S212A may be executed.

  Further, when the start port switch passing process is made a common routine, a common reserved memory number buffer similar to that shown in FIG. 46 may be used. In this case, after incrementing the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S213A, the CPU 56 replaces the processing in step S214A with the reserved memory specifying information storage area at the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer. A process of setting data indicated by the start port pointer is executed. Further, the CPU 56 replaces the processing in step S215A with each random value (random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, random value MR2-2 for determining the reach, fluctuation A random number value MR3 for pattern type determination and a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination) are extracted, and a process of storing them in the random number value storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed.

  Further, when the start port switch passing process is made a common routine, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination according to the same process as the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. After that (see step S331), the variation pattern is determined based on the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination (see step S333).

  Even when the start port switch passing process is made into a common routine, not all random values are extracted when a start winning occurs, but fluctuations such as a random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination and a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. The random value for determining the pattern may be extracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol (that is, at the timing of variation pattern determination (see steps S331 and S333)).

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and derives and displays a display result, and is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit The special game state in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to become the specific display result when the transition condition is satisfied and the normal game state is ended after the specific game state is completed. And can be suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a transition condition establishment notification effect capable of notifying that the transition condition is satisfied.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach generation probability at the time of determining not to make it a big hit and a small hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area) and a pending | holding buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the common pending | holding memory number buffer with which a 1st pending memory number and a 2nd pending memory number are provided in common. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the number of times of large winning a prize opening | release opening. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a non-reach symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a reach design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a probability change promotion effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for probability change promotion production execution determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for temporary stop symbol determination before a probability change promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for probability variation promotion operation frequency determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the temporary stop symbol determination table (for probability change alerting | reporting) during a probability change promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the temporary stop symbol determination table (for probability change alerting | reporting) during a probability change promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the temporary stop symbol determination table (for non-probability change alerting | reporting) during a probability change promotion effect. It is a flowchart which shows a movable member control. It is a flowchart which shows a movable member initial position control process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect performed in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the switching timing of the effect in the case where the probability change promotion effect is performed and the case where it is not performed in the variation display of the effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in round in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port switch passage process at the time of making into a common routine.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 90 Movable member 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
120 Operation buttons 503 Random number circuit

Claims (2)

A specific game state having a variable display unit for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and deriving and displaying the display result, and advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit And when the transition condition is satisfied, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is shifted to the special game state where the specific display result is more likely to be the specific display result after the specific game state is ended. , A gaming machine that executes a transition condition establishment notification effect capable of notifying that the transition condition is satisfied,
Whether the display result derived and displayed on the variable display unit is the specific display result, and whether the transition condition is satisfied when it is determined to be the specific display result before the display result is derived and displayed. A pre-determining means to determine;
A notification effect executing means capable of executing the transition condition establishment notification effect by performing image display based on the determination by the prior determination means as the specific display result;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Operation condition determining means for determining an operation condition that is a condition related to an operation using the operation means for notifying that the transition condition is satisfied during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect;
The notification effect executing means includes
Switching image display control for changing an image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect to a switching image when an operation by the operation unit is detected for each effective period of the operation by the operation unit during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect. Means,
The operation condition that is determined by the prior determination unit to establish the transition condition, and that is detected by the operation condition determination unit by detecting an operation by the operation unit during the effective period during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect. Is established , the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed to the switching image, and after the switching period has elapsed, the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed from the switching image to the transition condition. First image display control means for changing to a first image indicating establishment;
First image selection data setting means for setting first image selection data in order to select the first image displayed by the first image display control means from a plurality of images;
First image selection means for selecting the first image using the first image selection data set by the first image selection data setting means;
An image to be displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect when it is determined by the prior determination means that the transition condition is not satisfied and an operation by the operation means is detected during the effective period during execution of the transition condition satisfaction notification effect Second image display control for changing an image to be displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect from the switching image to a second image different from the first image when the switching period has elapsed after changing the switching image to the switching image. Means,
Second image selection data setting means for setting second image selection data in order to select the second image displayed by the second image display control means from a plurality of images;
Second image selection means for selecting the second image using the second image selection data set by the second image selection data setting means;
The operation determined by the pre-determining unit is determined to establish the transition condition, and the operation of the operation unit is detected during the effective period during execution of the transition condition establishment notification effect, but the operation condition determining unit determines When the condition is not satisfied, the image displayed in the transition condition establishment notification effect is changed from the switching image after the switching period has elapsed after the image displayed in the transition condition satisfaction notification effect is changed to the switching image. Image display control means when the operation condition to be changed to the second image is not satisfied;
An operation for setting selection data common to the second image selection data used by the second image selection means in order to select the second image displayed by the image display control means when the operation condition is not satisfied from a plurality of images. Selection data setting means when the condition is not satisfied;
A game machine comprising: an operation condition unsuccessful image selection unit that selects the second image using the common selection data set by the operation condition unsuccessful selection data setting unit. Reach determining means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state using the first random number based on the determination that the specific display result is not made by the prior determination means; ,
A variation pattern type determining unit that determines a variation pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types using a second random number based on a determination result by the prior determination unit and a determination result by the reach determination unit; ,
A plurality of variation patterns from the start of variable display of the identification information to the time when the variable display result is derived and displayed are included in one variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination means using a third random number. A variation pattern determining means for determining one of the types of variation patterns;
The variation pattern type determination means includes
In response to the determination that the reach state is set to the reach state by the reach determination unit, a plurality of types of reach variation pattern types in which the variable information display state of the identification information is set to the reach state using the second random number. Decide on one of the
In response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the reach determination means, a plurality of types of non-reach fluctuation patterns that do not set the variable information display state of the identification information to the reach state using the second random number. Decide on one of the types,
The reach variation pattern type includes a reach specific variation pattern type including a reach specific variation pattern that executes a specific effect during variable display of the identification information and sets the variable display state of the identification information as the reach state. ,
The non-reach variation pattern type includes a non-reach specific variation pattern type including a plurality of types of non-reach specific variation patterns that execute the specific effect during variable display of the identification information, and a non-reach variation pattern type that does not execute the specific effect. There is a non-reach normal variation pattern type that includes a reach normal variation pattern,
The variation pattern determining means includes
Corresponding to the determination that the reach state is set by the reach determination unit, a plurality of types included in one reach variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit using the third random number. Decide on one of the various reach variation patterns,
The third random number is used in response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the reach determination unit and the non-reach specific variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit. To determine one of a plurality of types of non-reach specific variation patterns,
The non-reach specific variation pattern has a longer variable display time from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the derivation display of the variable display result compared to the non-reach normal variation pattern, and the variation pattern determining means The ratio determined by is set to be low
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images